docs: OpenBSD Man Pages Added

57 files changed, 10352 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c7f17a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+MAN = afterboot.8 \
+      autoinstall.8 \
+      boot_config.8 \
+      bulk.8 \
+      crash.8 \
+      daily.8 \
+      diskless.8 \
+      genassym.sh.8 \
+      intro.8 \
+      netstart.8 \
+      rc.8 \
+      rc.conf.8 \
+      rc.d.8 \
+      rc.shutdown.8 \
+      rc.subr.8 \
+      release.8 \
+      security.8 \
+      ssl.8 \
+      starttls.8 \
+      sticky.8 \
+      yp.8
+
+SUBDIRS = man8.alpha \
+          man8.amd64 \
+          man8.arm64 \
+          man8.armv7 \
+          man8.hppa \
+          man8.i386 \
+          man8.landisk \
+          man8.loongson \
+          man8.luna88k \
+          man8.macppc \
+          man8.octeon \
+          man8.powerpc64 \
+          man8.riscv64 \
+          man8.sparc64
+
+include ../../mandoc.mk
+
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/afterboot.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/afterboot.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..19064ae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/afterboot.8
@@ -0,0 +1,568 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: afterboot.8,v 1.175 2025/05/05 20:50:03 tedu Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Marshall M. Midden
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\"
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
+.\"    must display the following acknowledgement:
+.\"	This product includes software developed by Marshall M. Midden.
+.\" 4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
+.\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 5 2025 $
+.Dt AFTERBOOT 8
+.\" Originally created by Marshall M. Midden -- 1997-10-20, m4@umn.edu
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm afterboot
+.Nd things to check after the first complete boot
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss Starting out
+This document attempts to list items for the system administrator
+to check and set up after the installation and first complete boot of the
+system.
+The idea is to create a list of items that can be checked off so that you have
+a warm fuzzy feeling that something obvious has not been missed.
+A basic knowledge of
+.Ux
+is assumed, otherwise run:
+.Pp
+.Dl $ help
+.Pp
+Complete instructions for correcting and fixing items are not provided.
+There are manual pages and other methodologies available for doing that.
+For example, to view the man page for the
+.Xr ls 1
+command, run:
+.Pp
+.Dl $ man 1 ls
+.Pp
+Administrators will rapidly become more familiar with
+.Ox
+by using the high quality manual pages.
+.Pp
+Some base programs and subsystems also come with sample configuration
+files in
+.Pa /etc/examples .
+.Ss Errata
+By the time that you have installed your system, it is possible that
+bugs in the release have been found.
+Security or reliability fixes can be found at
+.Lk https://www.openbsd.org/errata.html .
+Binary updates are made available for some architectures and can be installed
+using
+.Xr syspatch 8 .
+.Ss Login
+Log in on the console, or over the network using
+.Xr ssh 1 .
+For security reasons, it is bad practice to log in as root during regular use
+and maintenance of the system.
+Instead, administrators are encouraged to add a
+.Dq regular
+user, add said user to the
+.Dq wheel
+group, then use the
+.Xr su 1
+and
+.Xr doas 1
+commands when root privileges are required.
+.Pp
+The installation process provides an option to set up a user account.
+By default, accounts created via this method are automatically added to
+the
+.Dq wheel
+group.
+If that option was not used, see the paragraph
+.Sx Add new users
+below.
+.Pp
+To deny root logins over the network, edit the
+.Pa /etc/ssh/sshd_config
+file and set
+.Cm PermitRootLogin
+to
+.Dq no
+(see
+.Xr sshd_config 5 ) .
+.Ss Root password
+Change the password for the root user.
+(Note that throughout the documentation, the term
+.Dq superuser
+is a synonym for the root user.)
+Choose a password that has digits and special characters
+as well as from the upper and lower case alphabet.
+Do not choose any word in any language.
+It is common for an intruder to use dictionary attacks.
+Run the following command to change it:
+.Pp
+.Dl # passwd root
+.Pp
+To avoid the possibility of running rogue files placed in
+the superuser's
+.Ev PATH ,
+it should never contain the current directory
+.Pq Dq \&. .
+.Ss System date
+.Xr ntpd 8
+is used to automatically synchronize clocks with remote NTP servers.
+You can use
+.Xr ntpctl 8
+to check the status.
+To change the NTP server, see
+.Xr ntpd.conf 5 .
+.Pp
+Check the system date with the
+.Xr date 1
+command.
+If needed, change the date, and/or change the symbolic link of
+.Pa /etc/localtime
+to the correct time zone in the
+.Pa /usr/share/zoneinfo
+directory.
+.Pp
+Examples:
+.Pp
+Set the current date to January 27th, 2016 3:04pm:
+.Dl # date 201601271504
+.Pp
+Set the time zone to Atlantic Standard Time:
+.Dl # ln -fs /usr/share/zoneinfo/Canada/Atlantic /etc/localtime
+.Ss Check hostname
+Use the
+.Ic hostname
+command to verify that the name of your machine is correct.
+See the man page for
+.Xr hostname 1
+if it needs to be changed.
+You will also need to edit the
+.Pa /etc/myname
+file to have it stick around for the next reboot.
+.Ss Verify network interface configuration and routing tables
+The first thing to do is an
+.Ic ifconfig -a
+to see if the network interfaces are properly configured.
+Correct by editing
+.Pa /etc/hostname. Ns Ar interface
+(where
+.Ar interface
+is the interface name or link layer address, e.g.,
+.Dq em0 )
+and then using
+.Xr ifconfig 8
+to manually configure it
+if you do not wish to reboot.
+Read the
+.Xr hostname.if 5
+man page for more information on the format of
+.Pa /etc/hostname. Ns Ar interface
+files and instructions on configuring dynamic addresses.
+.Pp
+Routing tables are manipulated using
+.Xr route 8 .
+They can be viewed by issuing
+.Dq route -n show .
+The default gateway address is stored in the
+.Xr mygate 5
+file.
+If you need to edit this file, a painless way to reconfigure the network
+afterwards is
+.Ic route flush
+followed by a
+.Ic sh -x /etc/netstart
+command.
+Or, you may prefer to manually configure using a series of
+.Ic route add
+and
+.Ic route delete
+commands.
+.Pp
+Packets are not forwarded by default, due to RFC requirements.
+If you wish to route packets between interfaces, add one or both
+of the following directives (depending on whether IPv4 or IPv6 routing
+is required) to
+.Xr sysctl.conf 5 :
+.Pp
+.Dl net.inet.ip.forwarding=1
+.Dl net.inet6.ip6.forwarding=1
+.Pp
+See
+.Xr multicast 4
+for instructions on configuring multicast routing.
+.Ss Check DNS
+Use
+.Xr host 1
+or
+.Xr dig 1
+to check that domain name resolution is working properly.
+.Pp
+Most likely, the IP address of at least one domain name server
+was added to
+.Xr resolv.conf 5
+while installing the system.
+.Xr resolvd 8
+maintains
+.Pa /etc/resolv.conf
+at runtime.
+.Pp
+A
+.Xr hosts 5
+file can be used if there is a need for system specific name
+resolution entries.
+.Ss Check disk mounts
+Check that the disks are mounted correctly by
+comparing the
+.Pa /etc/fstab
+file against the output of the
+.Xr mount 8
+and
+.Xr df 1
+commands.
+Examples:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# cat /etc/fstab
+/dev/sd0a / ffs rw 1 1
+/dev/sd0d /usr ffs rw,nodev 1 2
+/dev/sd0e /var ffs rw,nodev,nosuid 1 3
+/dev/sd0g /tmp ffs rw,nodev,nosuid 1 4
+/dev/sd0h /home ffs rw,nodev,nosuid 1 5
+
+# mount
+/dev/sd0a on / type ffs (local)
+/dev/sd0d on /usr type ffs (local, nodev)
+/dev/sd0e on /var type ffs (local, nodev, nosuid)
+/dev/sd0g on /tmp type ffs (local, nodev, nosuid)
+/dev/sd0h on /home type ffs (local, nodev, nosuid)
+
+# df
+Filesystem  1024-blocks     Used    Avail Capacity  Mounted on
+/dev/sd0a         22311    14589     6606    69%    /
+/dev/sd0d        203399   150221    43008    78%    /usr
+/dev/sd0e         10447      682     9242     7%    /var
+/dev/sd0g         18823        2    17879     0%    /tmp
+/dev/sd0h          7519     5255     1888    74%    /home
+
+# pstat -s
+Device      512-blocks     Used    Avail Capacity  Priority
+/dev/sd0b       131072    84656    46416    65%    0
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Edit
+.Pa /etc/fstab
+and use the
+.Xr mount 8
+and
+.Xr umount 8
+commands as appropriate.
+Refer to the above example and
+.Xr fstab 5
+for information on the format of this file.
+.Pp
+You may wish to configure NFS partitions now too, or you can do them later.
+.Ss Check the running system
+You can use
+.Xr ps 1 ,
+.Xr netstat 1 ,
+and
+.Xr fstat 1
+to check on running processes, network connections, and opened files,
+respectively.
+.Sh FURTHER CHANGES
+The system should be usable now, but you may wish to do more customizing,
+such as adding users, etc.
+We suggest that you
+.Ic cd /etc
+and edit any files in that directory as necessary.
+.Pp
+Note that the
+.Pa /etc/motd
+file is modified by
+.Pa /etc/rc
+whenever the system is booted.
+To keep any custom message intact, ensure that you leave two blank lines
+at the top, or your message will be overwritten.
+.Ss Add new users
+Add users.
+There is an
+.Xr adduser 8
+script.
+You may use
+.Xr vipw 8
+to add users to the
+.Pa /etc/passwd
+file
+and edit
+.Pa /etc/group
+by hand to add new groups.
+You may also wish to edit
+.Pa /etc/login.conf
+and tune some of the limits documented in
+.Xr login.conf 5 .
+The manual page for
+.Xr su 1
+tells you to make sure to put people in
+the
+.Sq wheel
+group if they need root access.
+For example:
+.Pp
+.Dl wheel:*:0:root,myself
+.Ss System command scripts
+The
+.Pa /etc/rc.*\&
+scripts are invoked at boot time, after single-user mode has exited,
+and at shutdown.
+The whole process is controlled, more or less, by the master script
+.Pa /etc/rc .
+This script should not be changed by administrators.
+.Pp
+.Pa /etc/rc
+is in turn influenced by the configuration variables present in
+.Pa /etc/rc.conf .
+Again, this script should not be changed by administrators:
+site-specific changes should be made to
+.Pq freshly created if necessary
+.Pa /etc/rc.conf.local
+or by using the
+.Xr rcctl 8
+utility.
+.Pp
+Any commands which should be run before the system sets its
+secure level should be made to
+.Pa /etc/rc.securelevel ,
+and commands to be run after the system sets its
+secure level should be made to
+.Pa /etc/rc.local .
+Commands to be run before system shutdown should be set in
+.Pa /etc/rc.shutdown .
+.Pp
+For more information about system startup/shutdown files, see
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr securelevel 7 ,
+and
+.Xr rc.shutdown 8 .
+.Pp
+If you've installed X, you may want to turn on
+.Xr xenodm 1 ,
+the X Display Manager.
+To do this, change the value of
+.Va xenodm_flags
+in
+.Pa /etc/rc.conf.local .
+.Ss Set keyboard type
+Some architectures permit keyboard type control.
+Use the
+.Xr kbd 8
+command to change the keyboard encoding.
+.Ic kbd -l
+will list all available encodings.
+.Ic kbd xxx
+will select the
+.Ic xxx
+encoding.
+Store the encoding in
+.Pa /etc/kbdtype
+to make sure it is set automatically at boot time.
+.Ss Printers
+Edit
+.Pa /etc/printcap
+and
+.Pa /etc/hosts.lpd
+to set up any printers.
+Consult
+.Xr lpd 8
+and
+.Xr printcap 5
+if needed.
+.Ss Audio and video recording
+The
+.Xr audio 4
+and
+.Xr video 4
+drivers by default record only silence and blanked images.
+Normal recording can be enabled by adding the following directives to
+.Xr sysctl.conf 5 :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+kern.audio.record=1
+kern.video.record=1
+.Ed
+.Ss Power management
+If the BIOS supports it,
+.Xr apmd 8
+can be configured to act on different events and adjust device performance.
+In the following example it is configured to start on boot in automatic
+performance adjustment mode and suspend the system if no AC is connected and
+the estimated battery life is equal or below 15%:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# rcctl set apmd status on
+# rcctl set apmd flags -A -z 15
+.Ed
+.Ss Mail aliases
+Edit
+.Pa /etc/mail/aliases
+and set the three standard aliases to go to either a mailing list, or
+the system administrator.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# Well-known aliases -- these should be filled in!
+root:		sysadm
+manager:	root
+dumper:		root
+.Ed
+.Ss Mail
+The default mail agent on
+.Ox
+is
+.Xr smtpd 8 .
+Details on how to configure an alternative mailer are documented in
+.Xr mailer.conf 5 .
+.Pp
+.Ox
+ships with a default
+.Pa /etc/mail/smtpd.conf
+file that will work for simple installations.
+See
+.Xr smtpd.conf 5
+for information on configuring more complex setups.
+For the default installation,
+.Xr smtpd 8
+is configured to only accept connections from the local host.
+This makes it possible to send mail locally, but not receive mail from remote
+servers, which is ideal if you have one central incoming mail machine and
+several clients.
+To cause smtpd to accept external network connections, modify the
+.Ic listen on
+directive in
+.Pa /etc/mail/smtpd.conf
+to include the interfaces to listen on.
+.Ss Daily, weekly, monthly scripts
+Review
+.Xr daily 8
+to understand what the periodic system maintenance scripts do and
+how to customize them:
+For example, to enable
+.Ev ROOTBACKUP
+or to add local maintenance code to
+.Pa /etc/daily.local , /etc/weekly.local ,
+or
+.Pa /etc/monthly.local .
+.Ss Tighten up security
+You might wish to tighten up security more by editing
+.Pa /etc/fbtab
+as when installing X.
+Look at the other files in
+.Pa /etc
+and edit them as needed.
+(Do not edit files ending in
+.Pa .db
+\(em like
+.Pa pwd.db , spwd.db ,
+nor
+.Pa localtime ,
+nor
+.Pa rmt ,
+nor any directories.)
+.Ss Crontab (background running processes)
+Check what is running by typing
+.Ic crontab -l
+as root
+and see if anything unexpected is present.
+Do you need anything else?
+Do you wish to change things?
+See
+.Xr crontab 5 .
+.Ss Next day cleanup
+After the first night's
+.Xr security 8
+run, change ownerships and permissions
+on files, directories, and devices; root may have received mail
+with subject: "<hostname> daily insecurity output".
+This mail contains a set of security recommendations,
+presented as a list looking something like this:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+var/mail:
+        permissions (0755, 0775)
+etc/daily:
+        user (0, 3)
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The best bet is to follow the advice in that list.
+The recommended setting is the first item in parentheses, while
+the current setting is the second one.
+This list is generated by
+.Xr mtree 8
+using
+.Pa /etc/mtree/special .
+Use
+.Xr chmod 1 ,
+.Xr chgrp 1 ,
+and
+.Xr chown 8
+as needed.
+.Ss Daemons
+Enable/disable any daemon processes as necessary.
+.Xr intro 8
+contains a comprehensive guide to the various daemons available on the
+.Ox
+system.
+.Ss Packages
+Install your own packages.
+The
+.Ox
+ports collection includes a large set of third-party software.
+Most of it is available as binary packages that you can install using
+.Xr pkg_add 1 .
+See
+.Xr packages 7
+for more details.
+To start daemons installed from packages, see
+.Xr rc.d 8 .
+.Pp
+There is also other third-party software that is available
+in source form only, either because it has not been ported to
+.Ox
+yet, or because licensing restrictions make binary redistribution
+impossible.
+Sometimes checking the mailing lists for
+past problems that people have encountered will result in a fix posted.
+.Ss Compiling a kernel
+Information on building and modifying kernels
+is contained within
+.Xr config 8 .
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr doas 1 ,
+.Xr ksh 1 ,
+.Xr man 1 ,
+.Xr pkg_add 1 ,
+.Xr ps 1 ,
+.Xr vi 1 ,
+.Xr multicast 4 ,
+.Xr hier 7 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr dmesg 8 ,
+.Xr ifconfig 8 ,
+.Xr intro 8 ,
+.Xr rcctl 8 ,
+.Xr sysctl 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+This document first appeared in
+.Ox 2.2 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/autoinstall.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/autoinstall.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9fef3643
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/autoinstall.8
@@ -0,0 +1,250 @@
+.\"     $OpenBSD: autoinstall.8,v 1.25 2021/11/08 16:12:10 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2013 Robert Peichaer <rpe@openbsd.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: November 8 2021 $
+.Dt AUTOINSTALL 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm autoinstall
+.Nd unattended OpenBSD installation and upgrade
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm
+allows unattended installation or upgrade of
+.Ox
+by automatically responding to installer questions with
+answers from a response file.
+.Nm
+uses DHCP to discover the location of the response
+file and HTTP to fetch the file.
+If that fails, the installer asks for the location which can either be
+a URL or a local path.
+.Pp
+See
+.Xr install.site 5
+for how to provide custom configuration.
+.Pp
+To start unattended installation or upgrade choose '(A)utoinstall' at the
+install prompt.
+If there is only one network interface, the installer fetches the response
+file via that interface.
+If there is more than one network interface, a selection is presented
+and the installer fetches the response file via the selected interface.
+.Pp
+If the machine is netbooted, the
+.Nm
+feature is invoked if the user does not intervene within
+a short time.
+It behaves as if the user selected '(A)utoinstall', but
+always fetches the response file via the netboot interface.
+.Pp
+If either
+.Pa /auto_install.conf
+or
+.Pa /auto_upgrade.conf
+is found on
+.Pa bsd.rd Ns 's
+built-in RAM disk,
+.Nm
+behaves as if the machine is netbooted, but uses the local response file.
+In case both files exist,
+.Pa /auto_install.conf
+takes precedence.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+uses HTTP to fetch one of the files
+.Pa install.conf ,
+.Ar MAC_address Ns - Ns Pa install.conf
+or
+.Ar hostname Ns - Ns Pa install.conf
+for install answers, or one of
+.Pa upgrade.conf ,
+.Ar MAC_address Ns - Ns Pa upgrade.conf
+or
+.Ar hostname Ns - Ns Pa upgrade.conf
+for upgrade answers.
+.Pp
+The URL used to fetch the file is constructed from
+.Xr dhcp-options 5
+statements extracted from the DHCP lease file.
+.Ic next-server
+specifies the
+.Ar server .
+.Ic filename
+specifies the
+.Ar filename .
+The statement
+.Ic option host-name
+specifies the
+.Ar hostname
+which is also used as the default hostname during installation.
+.Pp
+If
+.Ar filename
+is
+.Cm auto_install ,
+then the URLs tried are, in order:
+.Sm off
+.Bd -unfilled -offset indent
+.No http:// Ar server No / Ar MAC_address No -install.conf
+.No http:// Ar server No / Ar hostname No -install.conf
+.No http:// Ar server No /install.conf
+.Ed
+.Sm on
+.Pp
+where
+.Ar MAC_address
+is a string of six hex octets separated by colons
+representing the MAC
+address of the interface being used to fetch the files.
+.Pp
+If
+.Ar filename
+is
+.Cm auto_upgrade ,
+the URLs tried are, in order:
+.Sm off
+.Bd -unfilled -offset indent
+.No http:// Ar server No / Ar MAC_address No -upgrade.conf
+.No http:// Ar server No / Ar hostname No -upgrade.conf
+.No http:// Ar server No /upgrade.conf
+.Ed
+.Sm on
+.Pp
+On architectures where the
+.Ic filename
+statement is used to provide the name of the file to netboot
+it is necessary to create symbolic links called
+.Pa auto_install
+and
+.Pa auto_upgrade
+that point to the expected boot program
+and to change the value of the
+.Ic filename
+statement in the
+.Xr dhcpd.conf 5
+file to be
+.Cm auto_install
+or
+.Cm auto_upgrade .
+.Pp
+To use a subdirectory as response file location on the HTTP server, the same
+directory structure containing the symbolic links has to exist in the tftproot
+directory.
+The value of
+.Ic filename
+has to be the full path to these symbolic links, and the HTTP and TFTP servers
+must be on the same machine.
+.Pp
+The response file is a line-oriented ASCII text file.
+The format of each line is:
+.Pp
+.D1 Ar question No = Ar answer
+.Pp
+.Ar question
+is an installer question (not including the question mark) or a non-ambiguous
+part of it, consisting of whitespace separated words.
+.Ar answer
+is the answer to the question.
+Passwords may be in plaintext, encrypted with
+.Xr encrypt 1 ,
+or set to
+.Ql *************
+(13 '*'s) to disable password logins, only permitting alternative access methods
+(for example,
+.Xr ssh 1
+keys).
+.Pp
+If
+.Nm
+does not find an answer in the response file, the default answer as
+provided by the installer is used.
+.Pp
+The response file may contain answers to the following questions, which are
+only available during unattended installation to provide additional installer
+features:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Public ssh key for root account = Ar ssh key
+.Ar ssh key
+is stored in
+.Pa /root/.ssh/authorized_keys .
+.It Public ssh key for user puffy = Ar ssh key
+.Ar ssh key
+is stored in
+.Pa ~puffy/.ssh/authorized_keys .
+.It URL to autopartitioning template for disklabel = Ar url
+A template file for
+.Xr disklabel 8
+autopartitioning is fetched from
+.Ar url
+allowing a custom partition layout for the root disk.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/etc/dhcpd.confXXX" -compact
+.It Pa /etc/dhcpd.conf
+.Xr dhcpd 8
+configuration file
+.It Pa install.conf
+response file for unattended installation
+.It Pa upgrade.conf
+response file for unattended upgrade
+.El
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+A typical
+.Pa install.conf
+file will look something like this:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+System hostname = server1
+Password for root = $2b$14$Z4xRMg8vDpgYH...GVot3ySoj8yby
+Change the default console to com0 = yes
+Which speed should com0 use = 19200
+Setup a user = puffy
+Password for user = *************
+Public ssh key for user = ssh-ed25519 AAAAC3NzaC1...g3Aqre puffy@ai
+What timezone are you in = Europe/Stockholm
+Location of sets = http
+HTTP Server = cdn.openbsd.org
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The same file could be used for upgrades by creating a symbolic link called
+.Pa upgrade.conf
+that points to
+.Pa install.conf .
+The upgrade process will only use the answers it needs.
+.Pp
+And an example
+.Xr dhcpd.conf 5
+.Ic host
+declaration:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+host foo {
+  hardware ethernet 00:50:60:49:8b:84;
+  fixed-address 192.168.2.180;
+  filename "auto_install";
+  option host-name "foo";
+}
+.Ed
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr dhcp-options 5 ,
+.Xr dhcpd.conf 5 ,
+.Xr install.site 5 ,
+.Xr diskless 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+feature first appeared in
+.Ox 5.5 .
+.Sh AUTHORS
+.An Robert Peichaer Aq Mt rpe@openbsd.org
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/boot_config.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/boot_config.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..63a228af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/boot_config.8
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_config.8,v 1.34 2025/05/05 20:50:03 tedu Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1996 Mats O Jansson
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 4. Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 5 2025 $
+.Dt BOOT_CONFIG 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_config
+.Nd how to change kernel configuration at boot
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm BOOT_CONFIG
+is a kernel option that makes it possible to change the configuration
+at boot time.
+The same interface is available from userland, using the
+.Fl e
+argument to
+.Xr config 8 .
+.Pp
+The boot time configuration is invoked by passing the
+.Fl c
+option, either from the firmware prompt or,
+depending on the architecture, when the bootstrap loader
+prompts for a kernel to boot:
+.Bd -literal
+>> OpenBSD/i386 BOOT 3.26
+.No "boot>" Ic boot -c
+booting hd0a:/bsd: ...
+\&...
+real mem  = 1073086464 (1023MB)
+avail mem = 1043189760 (994MB)
+User Kernel Config
+UKC>
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Changes made can be saved for the next reboot, by using
+.Xr config 8 .
+However, those changes would not persist across system upgrades and would
+prevent kernel relinking.
+To ensure these changes are carried over to upgraded kernels, they can
+be saved to the
+.Xr bsd.re-config 5
+configuration file.
+.Sh COMMANDS
+.Bl -tag -width "disable devno | dev"
+.It Ic add Ar dev
+Add a device through copying another.
+.It Ic base Cm 8 | 10 | 16
+Change the base of numbers displayed and entered.
+.It Ic change Ar devno | dev
+Modify one or more devices.
+.It Ic disable Ar devno | dev
+Disable one or more devices.
+.It Ic enable Ar devno | dev
+Enable one or more devices.
+.It Ic exit
+Continue boot.
+.It Ic find Ar devno | dev
+Find one or more devices.
+.It Ic help
+Give a short summary of all commands and their arguments.
+.It Ic list
+Show all known devices, a screen at a time.
+.It Ic lines Op Ar count
+Set the number of rows per page.
+.It Ic quit
+Continue boot.
+.It Ic show Op Ar attr Op Ar val
+Show all devices for which attribute
+.Ar attr
+has the value
+.Ar val .
+.It Ic verbose
+Toggle the autoconfig verbose variable.
+.El
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+The Ethernet card is not detected at boot because the kernel configuration
+does not match the physical hardware configuration,
+e.g. wrong IRQ in OpenBSD/i386.
+The Ethernet card is supposed to use the
+.Xr ne 4
+driver.
+.Bd -literal
+.No UKC> Ic find ne
+24 ne0 at isa0 port 0x240 size 0 iomem 0xd8000 iosiz 0 irq 9 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+25 ne1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 10 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+26 ne* at isapnp0 port -1 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq -1 drq -1 flags 0x0
+27 ne* at pci* dev -1 function -1 flags 0x0
+28 ne* at pcmcia* function -1 irq -1 flags 0x0
+UKC>
+.Ed
+.Pp
+ne1 seems to match the configuration except it uses IRQ 5 instead of IRQ 10.
+So the irq on ne1 should be changed via the
+.Fa change
+command.
+The device can be specified by either name or number.
+.Bd -literal
+.No UKC> Ic change ne1
+25 ne1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 10 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+.No change (y/n) \&? Ic y
+.No port [0x300] \&?
+.No size [0] \&?
+.No iomem [-1] \&?
+.No iosiz [0] \&?
+.No irq [10] \&? Ic 5
+.No drq [-1] \&?
+.No drq2 [-1] \&?
+.No flags [0] \&?
+25 ne1 changed
+25 ne1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 5 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+UKC>
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The show command is useful for finding which devices have a certain attribute.
+It can also be used to find those devices with a particular value for
+an attribute.
+.Bd -literal
+.No UKC> Ic show slot
+  2 ahc* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+ 10 uha* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+ 12 ep0 at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+ 17 ep* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+102 ahb* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+103 fea* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+.No UKC> Ic show port 0x300
+ 25 ne1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 10 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+ 72 we1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem 0xcc000 iosiz 0 irq 10 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+ 75 el0 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 9 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+ 77 ie1 at isa0 port 0x300 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq 10 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+UKC>
+.Ed
+.Pp
+It is possible to add new devices, but only devices that were linked into the
+kernel.
+If a new device is added, following devices will be renumbered.
+.Bd -literal
+.No UKC> Ic find ep
+ 11 ep0 at isa0 port -1 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq -1 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+ 12 ep0 at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+ 13 ep0 at pci* dev -1 function -1 flags 0x0
+ 14 ep* at isapnp0 port -1 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq -1 drq -1 flags 0x0
+ 15 ep* at isa0 port -1 size 0 iomem -1 iosiz 0 irq -1 drq -1 drq2 -1 flags 0x0
+ 16 ep* at eisa0 slot -1 flags 0x0
+ 17 ep* at pci* dev -1 function -1 flags 0x0
+ 18 ep* at pcmcia* dev -1 irq -1 flags 0x0
+.No UKC> Ic add ep1
+.No "Clone Device (DevNo, 'q' or '\&?') \&?" Ic 13
+.No "Insert before Device (DevNo, 'q' or '\&?')" Ic 14
+ 14 ep1 at pci* dev -1 function -1
+.No UKC> Ic change 14
+ 14 ep1 at pci* dev -1 function -1
+.No change (y/n) \&? Ic y
+.No dev [-1] \&? Ic 14
+.No function [-1] \&?
+.No flags [0] \&? Ic 18
+ 14 ep1 changed
+ 14 ep1 at pci* dev 14 function -1 flags 0x12
+UKC>
+.Ed
+.Pp
+When configuration is completed, booting can proceed by issuing the
+.Ic quit
+or
+.Ic exit
+commands.
+.Bd -literal
+.No UKC> Ic quit
+Continuing...
+mainbus0 (root)
+.Ed
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr bsd.re-config 5 ,
+.Xr config 8
+.Sh AUTHORS
+.An Mats O Jansson Aq Mt moj@stacken.kth.se
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/bulk.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/bulk.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ef333e85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/bulk.8
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: bulk.8,v 1.11 2025/06/15 19:27:34 tb Exp $
+.\"
+.\"	Copyright (c) 2016 Marc Espie <espie@openbsd.org>
+.\"
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.Dd $Mdocdate: June 15 2025 $
+.Dt BULK 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm bulk
+.Nd building OpenBSD packages in bulk
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+There are quite a few steps necessary to build packages on a cluster.
+They are:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact -offset indent
+.It
+Choose master machine setup and create partitions.
+.It
+Setup chrooted builds on the master.
+.It
+Add slaves and do a full bulk.
+.It
+Clean up and do subsequent bulks.
+.It
+Perform additional maintenance.
+.El
+.Ss 1. Choose master machine setup and create partitions
+Setup a master machine with enough room for a chroot, say
+.Pa /build .
+Assuming you are using a cluster of machines,
+this chroot should contain NFS exportable partitions for distfiles,
+plists, and packages (one single partition can be used for simplicity).
+A full setup currently requires in the order of 120GB for distfiles
+and 80GB for packages.
+Expect these numbers to grow.
+150GB for each should last a few years.
+.Pp
+It is possible to build packages without a chroot, but the space
+requirement difference is negligible (a full
+.Ox
+install is less than 2GB), and having everything chrooted means you may
+install useful tools to help with the process outside of the chroot
+.Po
+for instance
+.Xr rsync 1
+.Pc .
+.Pp
+Reserve one "scratch" partition under the chroot for WRKOBJDIR
+(for instance, mfs, async, or SSD).
+This can often double as
+.Pa /tmp
+under the chroot.
+The largest ports can take in excess of 20GB each (more for a debug
+build) and you may have several of these built at the same time.
+50GB is probably a reasonable minimum on an architecture which can build
+chromium, though 100GB would not be overkill, especially if you have
+many cores.
+.Pp
+Alternately, you can setup your whole chroot as a scratch partition,
+and reserve one more permanent space under it for distfiles,
+packages, and plists.
+.Pp
+Choose a strategy for the ports tree itself.
+There must be a copy under
+.Pa /build .
+You can either copy it from outside the chroot, have it in an NFS
+partition, or manually make sure all machines on the cluster have the
+same ports tree (cvs checkout, rsync ...).
+.Pp
+Note that logs are only produced on the master, and thus do not
+need to be nfs exportable, nor even inside the chroot.
+.Pp
+.Ox
+now comes with default users for package builds, namely _pbuild and _pfetch.
+.Pp
+The default
+.Xr login.conf 5
+is appropriate for most setups, but _pbuild's datasize-cur may need
+to be bumped for a few ports.
+Likewise, maxproc-cur is too small for machines with more than 4-6 cpus.
+.Pp
+Note that _pbuild does not need network access, and is now blocked by default
+in
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.Pp
+Recent
+.Ox
+systems do not need any kind of
+.Xr doas 1
+setup for bulk ports builds, as
+.Xr dpb 1
+is run as root and drops permissions appropriately.
+.Pp
+However, you may still want to setup
+.Xr doas 1
+for root, if you want to manually fix ports, as
+.Ar PORTS_PRIVSEP
+relies on it.
+.Ss 2. Setup chrooted builds on the master
+Populate the initial chroot with
+.Xr proot 1 .
+Point DISTDIR, PACKAGE_REPOSITORY, PLIST_REPOSITORY, WRKOBJDIR
+to appropriate locations.
+.Pp
+Pay attention to nodev and wxallowed warnings.
+A chroot setup that can't have devices won't work at all.
+A setup without wxallowed in /usr/local and WRKOBJDIR won't
+build a lot of things.
+.Pp
+Check that this setup can build ports by running
+.Li dpb -B /build
+as root.
+Fix any issues related to file ownership at this point.
+See
+.Xr dpb 1
+for details.
+.Pp
+If your WRKOBJDIR is a temporary partition, make sure it
+belongs to _pbuild:_pbuild after a reboot.
+.Ss 3. Add slaves and do a full bulk
+Create identical slave machines with the same release material.
+Have them import the NFS partitions from the master, they
+don't need root access to the partitions.
+Set up
+.Xr ssh 1
+so that the master can connect to the slaves, using ssh protocol 2,
+as root, preferably without a password or passphrase (however,
+.Xr dpb 1
+uses a master connection, so a password would be required just once per host).
+.Pp
+Note that code on slave machines will only run as _pbuild
+(during builds) or root (during dependency installation).
+Slave machines only require highly restricted network access.
+They just need to act as nfs clients to the master and to be reachable
+through ssh from the master.
+.Pp
+Use a similar
+.Xr proot 1
+config to populate each slave.
+.Pp
+You should now be able to build ports on the slaves.
+A simple config will just have
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+DEFAULT chroot=/build
+localhost
+host1
+\&...
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Check that the full config can still build ports.
+.Pp
+You're now ready for a full bulk.
+Beware that even fast configs (3 amd64 with 8 cores each) may take over 24 hours
+to finish.
+It's generally appropriate to run
+.Xr dpb 1
+under
+.Xr tmux 1 .
+.Ss 4. Clean up and do subsequent bulks
+Before running the next bulk, you should set up rotating logs and move the
+PACKAGE_REPOSITORY away.
+Save the PLIST_REPOSITORY and DISTDIR though.
+PLIST_REPOSITORY will catch problems in packing-lists.
+.Pa ${PLIST_REPOSITORY}/${ARCH}/history
+is also used to store
+.Xr sha256 1
+history, necessary to reorder files inside packages to speed updates up.
+.Pp
+The DISTDIR contains history information as well as DISTDIR/build-stats
+to speed further runs up.
+.Pp
+How you wipe things out depends on your setup.
+If you run
+.Xr proot 1
+again each time, most things will get cleaned up automatically
+.Po
+.Pa /build/usr/local , /build/var/db/pkg ...
+.Pc .
+Note that known directories such as WRKOBJDIR do not get cleaned up
+automatically, so you may want to set up a STARTUP_SCRIPT in
+.Xr dpb 1 .
+.Ss 5. Perform additional maintenance
+.Xr clean-old-distfiles 1
+should be run occasionally since the DISTDIR will continue growing.
+.Pp
+.Xr pkg_check-problems 1
+should be run occasionally to find out conflicts and dependency issues.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr clean-old-distfiles 1 ,
+.Xr dpb 1 ,
+.Xr pkg_check-problems 1 ,
+.Xr proot 1 ,
+.Xr register-plist 1 ,
+.Xr tmux 1 ,
+.Xr bsd.port.mk 5 ,
+.Xr release 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/crash.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/crash.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54a958a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/crash.8
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: crash.8,v 1.37 2022/09/11 06:38:11 jmc Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	from: @(#)crash.8	6.5 (Berkeley) 4/20/91
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 11 2022 $
+.Dt CRASH 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm crash
+.Nd system failure and diagnosis
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+This section explains what happens when the system crashes
+and (very briefly) how to analyze crash dumps.
+.Pp
+When the system crashes voluntarily it prints a message of the form
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+panic: why i gave up the ghost
+.Ed
+.Pp
+on the console and enters the kernel debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 .
+.Pp
+If you wish to report this panic, you should include the output of
+the
+.Ic ps
+and
+.Ic trace
+commands.
+Unless the
+.Sq ddb.log
+sysctl has been disabled, anything output to screen will be
+appended to the system message buffer, from where it may be
+possible to retrieve it through the
+.Xr dmesg 8
+command after a warm reboot.
+If the debugger command
+.Ic boot dump
+is entered, or if the debugger was not compiled into the kernel, or
+the debugger was disabled with
+.Xr sysctl 8 ,
+then the system dumps the contents of physical memory
+onto a mass storage peripheral device.
+The particular device used is determined by the
+.Sq dumps on
+directive in the
+.Xr config 8
+file used to build the kernel.
+.Pp
+After the dump has been written, the system then
+invokes the automatic reboot procedure as
+described in
+.Xr reboot 8 .
+If auto-reboot is disabled (in a machine dependent way), the system
+will simply halt at this point.
+.Pp
+Upon rebooting, and
+unless some unexpected inconsistency is encountered in the state
+of the file systems due to hardware or software failure, the system
+will copy the previously written dump into
+.Pa /var/crash
+using
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+before resuming multi-user operations.
+.Ss Causes of system failure
+The system has a large number of internal consistency checks; if one
+of these fails, then it will panic with a very short message indicating
+which one failed.
+In many instances, this will be the name of the routine which detected
+the error, or a two-word description of the inconsistency.
+A full understanding of most panic messages requires perusal of the
+source code for the system.
+.Pp
+The most common cause of system failures is hardware failure
+.Pq e.g., bad memory
+which
+can reflect itself in different ways.
+Here are the messages which are most likely, with some hints as to causes.
+Left unstated in all cases is the possibility that a hardware or software
+error produced the message in some unexpected way.
+.Bl -tag -width indent
+.It no init
+This panic message indicates filesystem problems, and reboots are likely
+to be futile.
+Late in the bootstrap procedure, the system was unable to
+locate and execute the initialization process,
+.Xr init 8 .
+The root filesystem is incorrect or has been corrupted, or the mode
+or type of
+.Pa /sbin/init
+forbids execution.
+.It trap type %d, code=%x, pc=%x
+A unexpected trap has occurred within the system; the trap types are
+machine dependent and can be found listed in
+.Pa /sys/arch/ARCH/include/trap.h .
+.Pp
+The code is the referenced address, and the pc is the program counter at the
+time of the fault is printed.
+Hardware flakiness will sometimes generate this panic, but if the cause
+is a kernel bug,
+the kernel debugger
+.Xr ddb 4
+can be used to locate the instruction and subroutine inside the kernel
+corresponding
+to the PC value.
+If that is insufficient to suggest the nature of the problem,
+more detailed examination of the system status at the time of the trap
+usually can produce an explanation.
+.It init died
+The system initialization process has exited.
+This is bad news, as no new users will then be able to log in.
+Rebooting is the only fix, so the system just does it right away.
+.It out of mbufs: map full
+The network has exhausted its private page map for network buffers.
+This usually indicates that buffers are being lost, and rather than
+allow the system to slowly degrade, it reboots immediately.
+The map may be made larger if necessary.
+.El
+.Pp
+That completes the list of panic types you are likely to see.
+.Ss Analyzing a dump
+When the system crashes it writes (or at least attempts to write)
+an image of memory, including the kernel image, onto the dump device.
+On reboot, the kernel image and memory image are separated and preserved in
+the directory
+.Pa /var/crash .
+.Pp
+To analyze the kernel and memory images preserved as
+.Pa bsd.0
+and
+.Pa bsd.0.core ,
+you should run
+.Xr gdb 1 ,
+loading in the images with the following commands:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# gdb
+GNU gdb 6.3
+Copyright 2004 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+GDB is free software, covered by the GNU General Public License, and you are
+welcome to change it and/or distribute copies of it under certain conditions.
+Type "show copying" to see the conditions.
+There is absolutely no warranty for GDB.  Type "show warranty" for details.
+This GDB was configured as "i386-unknown-openbsd4.6".
+(gdb) file /var/crash/bsd.0
+Reading symbols from /var/crash/bsd.0...(no debugging symbols found)...done.
+(gdb) target kvm /var/crash/bsd.0.core
+.Ed
+.Pp
+[Note that the
+.Dq kvm
+target is currently only supported by
+.Xr gdb 1
+on some architectures.]
+.Pp
+After this, you can use the
+.Ic where
+command to show trace of procedure calls that led to the crash.
+.Pp
+For custom-built kernels, you should use
+.Pa bsd.gdb
+instead of
+.Pa bsd ,
+thus allowing
+.Xr gdb 1
+to show symbolic names for addresses and line numbers from the source.
+.Pp
+Analyzing saved system images is sometimes called post-mortem debugging.
+There are a class of analysis tools designed to work on
+both live systems and saved images, most of them are linked with the
+.Xr kvm 3
+library and share option flags to specify the kernel and memory image.
+These tools typically take the following flags:
+.Bl -tag -width indent
+.It Fl M Ar core
+Normally this
+.Ar core
+is an image produced by
+.Xr savecore 8
+but it can be
+.Pa /dev/mem
+too, if you are looking at the live system.
+.It Fl N Ar system
+Takes a kernel
+.Ar system
+image as an argument.
+This is where the symbolic information is gotten from,
+which means the image cannot be stripped.
+In some cases, using a
+.Pa bsd.gdb
+version of the kernel can assist even more.
+.El
+.Pp
+The following commands understand these options:
+.Xr fstat 1 ,
+.Xr netstat 1 ,
+.Xr nfsstat 1 ,
+.Xr ps 1 ,
+.Xr w 1 ,
+.Xr dmesg 8 ,
+.Xr iostat 8 ,
+.Xr kgmon 8 ,
+.Xr pstat 8 ,
+.Xr trpt 8 ,
+.Xr vmstat 8
+and many others.
+There are exceptions, however.
+For instance,
+.Xr ipcs 1
+has renamed the
+.Fl M
+argument to be
+.Fl C
+instead.
+.Pp
+Examples of use:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# ps -N /var/crash/bsd.0 -M /var/crash/bsd.0.core -O paddr
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The
+.Fl O Ar paddr
+option prints each process'
+.Vt struct proc
+address.
+This is very useful information if you are analyzing process contexts in
+.Xr gdb 1 .
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# vmstat -N /var/crash/bsd.0 -M /var/crash/bsd.0.core -m
+.Ed
+.Pp
+This analyzes memory allocations at the time of the crash.
+Perhaps some resource was starving the system?
+.Ss Analyzing a live kernel
+Like the tools mentioned above,
+.Xr gdb 1
+can be used to analyze a live system as well.
+This can be accomplished by not specifying a crash dump when selecting the
+.Dq kvm
+target:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+(gdb) target kvm
+.Ed
+.Pp
+It is possible to inspect processes that entered the kernel by
+specifying a process'
+.Vt struct proc
+address to the
+.Ic kvm proc
+command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+(gdb) kvm proc 0xd69dada0
+#0  0xd0355d91 in sleep_finish (sls=0x0, do_sleep=0)
+    at ../../../../kern/kern_synch.c:217
+217                     mi_switch();
+.Ed
+.Pp
+After this, the
+.Ic where
+command will show a trace of procedure calls, right back to where the
+selected process entered the kernel.
+.Sh CRASH LOCATION DETERMINATION
+The following example should make it easier for a novice kernel
+developer to find out where the kernel crashed.
+.Pp
+First, in
+.Xr ddb 4
+find the function that caused the crash.
+It is either the function at the top of the traceback or the function
+under the call to
+.Fn panic
+or
+.Fn uvm_fault .
+.Pp
+The point of the crash usually looks something like this "function+0x4711".
+.Pp
+Find the function in the sources, let's say that the function is in "foo.c".
+.Pp
+Go to the kernel build directory, e.g.,
+.Pa /sys/arch/ARCH/compile/GENERIC ,
+and do the following:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# objdump -S foo.o | less
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Find the function in the output.
+The function will look something like this:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+0: 17 47 11 42         foo %x, bar, %y
+4: foo bar             allan %kaka
+8: XXXX                boink %bloyt
+etc.
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The first number is the offset.
+Find the offset that you got in the ddb trace
+(in this case it's 4711).
+.Pp
+When reporting data collected in this way, include ~20 lines before and ~10
+lines after the offset from the objdump output in the crash report, as well
+as the output of
+.Xr ddb 4 Ns 's
+"show registers" command.
+It's important that the output from objdump includes at least two or
+three lines of C code.
+.Sh REPORTING
+If you are sure you have found a reproducible software bug in the kernel,
+and need help in further diagnosis, or already have a fix, use
+.Xr sendbug 1
+to send the developers a detailed description including the entire session
+from
+.Xr gdb 1 .
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr gdb 1 ,
+.Xr sendbug 1 ,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/daily.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/daily.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22071017
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/daily.8
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: daily.8,v 1.31 2024/07/04 05:06:58 bket Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2003 Jason McIntyre <jmc@openbsd.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: July 4 2024 $
+.Dt DAILY 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm daily , weekly , monthly
+.Nd periodic system maintenance
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The three files
+.Pa /etc/daily ,
+.Pa /etc/weekly ,
+and
+.Pa /etc/monthly
+are shell scripts run on a periodic basis by the clock daemon,
+.Xr cron 8 .
+They take care of some basic administrative tasks.
+Their output, if any, is mailed to root.
+.Pp
+.Sy Note :
+The scripts are all run as part of root's
+.Xr crontab 5 .
+However, it is strongly suggested that the root mail account
+be an alias that forwards messages to a real user or set of users.
+Otherwise, root's mail will simply accumulate in
+.Pa /var/mail
+until the partition holding it runs out of space.
+See
+.Xr newaliases 8
+for further details.
+.Pp
+These scripts should not be altered.
+Local additions should be made to the files
+.Pa /etc/daily.local ,
+.Pa /etc/weekly.local ,
+and
+.Pa /etc/monthly.local ,
+which will be executed by
+.Pa /etc/daily ,
+.Pa /etc/weekly ,
+and
+.Pa /etc/monthly ,
+respectively.
+The
+.Pa *.local
+files are executed first, which makes it convenient to do any necessary
+cleanup and backup and to define any required shell variables before the
+script is run.
+.Ss /etc/daily
+This script is run daily.
+It currently does the following:
+.Bl -dash
+.It
+Runs the script
+.Pa /etc/daily.local ,
+if it exists.
+.It
+Removes scratch and junk files from
+.Pa /tmp .
+.It
+Purges accounting records from
+.Pa /var/account ,
+if they exist.
+Processes that were killed due to pledge or memory access violations,
+or had file access prevented by unveil,
+are reported in the daily mail.
+See
+.Xr accton 8 ,
+.Xr lastcomm 1 ,
+and
+.Xr sa 8 .
+.It
+Creates a backup root file system which is updated daily.
+This only happens if the following conditions are met:
+.Bl -enum -offset indent
+.It
+The environment variable
+.Ev ROOTBACKUP
+must be set.
+For example, the following can be added to
+.Pa /etc/daily.local :
+.Pp
+.Dl ROOTBACKUP=1
+.It
+The mount directory
+.Pa /altroot
+must exist, and there must be an
+.Pa /etc/fstab
+entry specifying a configured disk device, the file system type
+.Sq ffs ,
+and
+.Sq xx
+for the mount options, e.g.
+.Pp
+.Dl /dev/wd0j /altroot ffs xx 0 0
+.El
+.It
+Checks daemon status.
+Lists any daemons which are enabled in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8
+but which are not actually running.
+.It
+Reports on which file systems need to be dumped via
+.Xr dump 8 .
+.It
+Runs the
+.Xr calendar 1
+utility unless the environment variable
+.Ev CALENDAR
+is set to 0 in
+.Pa /etc/daily.local
+or the host is a
+.Xr yp 8
+client.
+.It
+If
+.Ev CHECKFILESYSTEMS
+is set to 1 in
+.Pa /etc/daily.local ,
+runs
+.Xr fsck 8
+with the no-write flag
+.Pq Fl n .
+.It
+If the file
+.Pa /etc/Distfile
+exists, runs the
+.Xr rdist 1
+utility.
+.It
+Runs the system
+.Xr security 8
+check script.
+.El
+.Ss /etc/weekly
+This script is run weekly.
+It currently does the following:
+.Bl -dash
+.It
+Runs the script
+.Pa /etc/weekly.local ,
+if it exists.
+.It
+Rebuilds the
+.Xr locate 1
+database, if there is an existing
+.Pa /var/db/locate.database
+file.
+.It
+Rebuilds the
+.Xr whatis 1
+database(s) via
+.Xr makewhatis 8 .
+.It
+If
+.Ev LOGINACCOUNTING
+is set to 1 in
+.Pa /etc/weekly.local
+and the
+.Pa /var/log/wtmp
+file exists, show individual users' login via the
+.Xr ac 8
+utility.
+.El
+.Ss /etc/monthly
+This script is run monthly.
+It currently does the following:
+.Bl -dash
+.It
+Runs the script
+.Pa /etc/monthly.local ,
+if it exists.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+The following variables can be set in
+.Pa /etc/daily.local :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "CHECKFILESYSTEMS" -compact
+.It Ev CALENDAR
+If set to 0, do not run
+.Xr calendar 1 .
+.It Ev CHECKFILESYSTEMS
+If set to 1, run
+.Xr fsck 8
+with the no-write flag.
+.It Ev ROOTBACKUP
+If set to 1, make a backup of the root file system.
+.El
+.Pp
+The following variables can be set in
+.Pa /etc/weekly.local :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "CHECKFILESYSTEMS" -compact
+.It Ev LOGINACCOUNTING
+If set to 1, run
+.Xr ac 8
+to report login accounting.
+.It Ev MAKEWHATISARGS
+Arguments for
+.Xr makewhatis 8 ;
+empty by default.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/var/cron/tabs/root" -compact
+.It Pa /etc/daily
+Daily maintenance script.
+.It Pa /etc/daily.local
+Site specific daily maintenance script.
+.It Pa /etc/weekly
+Weekly maintenance script.
+.It Pa /etc/weekly.local
+Site specific weekly maintenance script.
+.It Pa /etc/monthly
+Monthly maintenance script.
+.It Pa /etc/monthly.local
+Site specific monthly maintenance script.
+.It Pa /var/cron/tabs/root
+Root
+.Xr crontab 5 .
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr calendar 1 ,
+.Xr crontab 1 ,
+.Xr locate 1 ,
+.Xr rdist 1 ,
+.Xr whatis 1 ,
+.Xr crontab 5 ,
+.Xr ac 8 ,
+.Xr accton 8 ,
+.Xr cron 8 ,
+.Xr dump 8 ,
+.Xr fsck 8 ,
+.Xr makewhatis 8 ,
+.Xr sa 8 ,
+.Xr security 8 ,
+.Xr yp 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm daily , weekly ,
+and
+.Nm monthly
+scripts first appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 Reno .
+This manual page first appeared in
+.Ox 3.4 .
+.Sh CAVEATS
+If the host machine is not running 24/7, these scripts may never be run.
+Adjusting the time fields in the system
+.Xr crontab 5
+may partially alleviate this problem.
+.Pp
+Be careful when adding local additions.
+Services such as
+.Qq www
+have their own users, and should be run as such, not as root.
+It may be more appropriate to create a separate
+.Xr crontab 5
+for such services.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/diskless.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/diskless.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..30f0e4f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/diskless.8
@@ -0,0 +1,425 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: diskless.8,v 1.72 2022/06/26 12:34:41 deraadt Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: diskless.8,v 1.7.4.1 1996/05/30 18:58:10 cgd Exp $
+.\"
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1994 Gordon W. Ross, Theo de Raadt
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
+.\"    derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: June 26 2022 $
+.Dt DISKLESS 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm diskless
+.Nd booting a system over the network
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The ability to boot a machine over the network is useful for
+.Em diskless
+or
+.Em dataless
+machines, or as a temporary measure while repairing or
+re-installing filesystems on a local disk.
+This file provides a general description of the interactions between
+a client and its server when a client is booting over the network.
+The general description is followed by specific instructions for
+configuring a server for diskless clients.
+.Pp
+When booting a system over the network, there are three
+phases of interaction between client and server:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact
+.It
+The PROM (or stage-1 bootstrap) loads a boot program.
+.It
+The boot program loads a kernel.
+.It
+The kernel does NFS mounts for root and swap.
+.El
+.Pp
+Each of these phases are described in further detail below.
+.Pp
+In
+.Em phase 1 ,
+the PROM loads a boot program.
+PROM designs vary widely, so this phase is inherently
+machine-specific.
+Sun and Motorola machines use RARP to determine the client's IP address
+and then use TFTP to download a boot program
+from whoever sent the RARP reply.
+HP 300-series machines use the
+HP Remote Maintenance Protocol
+to download a boot program.
+Other machines may load a
+network boot program either from diskette or
+using a special PROM on the network card.
+.Pp
+In
+.Em phase 2 ,
+the boot program loads a kernel.
+Operation in this phase depends on the design of the boot program.
+The procedure used by the boot program is as follows:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact
+.It
+The boot program
+gets the client IP address using RARP.
+.It
+The boot program
+gets the client name and server IP address by broadcasting an
+RPC/BOOTPARAMS/WHOAMI request with the client IP address.
+.It
+The boot program
+gets the server path for this client's root
+using an RPC/BOOTPARAMS/GETFILE request with the client name.
+.It
+The boot program
+gets the root file handle by calling
+.Xr mountd 8
+with the server path for the client root.
+.It
+The boot program
+gets the kernel file handle by calling
+NFS lookup on the root file handle.
+.It
+The boot program
+loads the kernel using
+NFS read calls on the kernel file handle.
+.It
+The boot program
+transfers control to the kernel entry point.
+.El
+.Pp
+In
+.Em phase 3 ,
+the kernel does NFS mounts for root and swap.
+The kernel repeats much of the work done by the boot program
+because there is no standard way for the boot program to pass
+the information it gathered on to the kernel.
+The procedure used by the kernel is as follows:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact
+.It
+The kernel finds a boot server using the same procedure
+as described in steps 1 and 2 of phase 2, above.
+.It
+The kernel gets the NFS
+file handle for root using the same procedure
+as described in steps 3, 4, and 5 of phase 2, above.
+.It
+The kernel calls the NFS
+getattr function to get the last-modified time of the root
+directory, and uses it to check the system clock.
+.It
+If the kernel is configured for swap on NFS,
+it uses the same mechanism as for root, but uses the NFS
+getattr function to determine the size of the swap area.
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Pa INSTALL. Ns Aq Ar arch
+notes that come with each distribution
+also give details on the specifics of net/diskless booting
+for each architecture.
+.Pp
+The procedures for AMD64 and i386 clients vary somewhat
+to the stages detailed above.
+See
+.Xr pxeboot 8
+for more detailed information.
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+Before a client can boot over the network,
+its server must be configured correctly.
+This example will demonstrate how to configure a server and client.
+.Pp
+Assuming the client's hostname is to be
+"myclient":
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+Add an entry to
+.Pa /etc/ethers
+corresponding to the client's Ethernet address:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+8:0:20:7:c5:c7          myclient
+.Ed
+.Pp
+This will be used by
+.Xr rarpd 8 .
+.It
+Assign an IP address for myclient in
+.Pa /etc/hosts :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+192.197.96.12           myclient
+.Ed
+.It
+If booting an alpha, amd64, hppa, i386,
+or sparc64 client,
+ensure that
+.Xr tftpd 8
+is configured to run in the directory
+.Pa /tftpboot .
+.Pp
+If booting an HP 300 or older HPPA machine, ensure that
+.Pa /etc/rbootd.conf
+is configured properly to transfer the boot program to the client.
+An entry might look like this:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+08:00:09:01:23:E6	SYS_UBOOT	# myclient
+.Ed
+.Pp
+See the
+.Xr rbootd 8
+manual page for more information.
+.It
+If booting a newer alpha, amd64, hppa, i386,
+or sparc64 client,
+install a copy of the appropriate diskless boot loader in the
+.Pa /tftpboot
+directory.
+.Pp
+If booting a Motorola or Sun client,
+make a link such that the boot program is
+accessible as a file named after the client's IP address in hex.
+For example:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# cd /tftpboot
+# ln -s boot.net C0C5600C
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The following example converts an IP address to hex:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+$ echo 192.197.96.12 | awk -F . \e
+	'{ printf "%02X%02X%02X%02X\en", $1, $2, $3, $4 }'
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Sun Sparc machines also require a
+.Dq . Ns Aq Ar arch
+suffix.
+So the filename in the example above for a Sun4 machine would be
+.Dq C0C5600C.SUN4 .
+The name used is really architecture dependent:
+it simply has to match what the booting client's PROM wishes it to be.
+If the client's PROM fails to fetch the expected file,
+.Xr tcpdump 8
+can be used to discover which filename the client is trying to read.
+.Pp
+Architectures using DHCP
+(newer alpha, amd64, hppa, or i386)
+should ensure that
+.Xr dhcpd 8
+is configured on the server to serve BOOTP protocol requests.
+An example entry in
+.Xr dhcpd.conf 5 :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+subnet 10.0.0.0 netmask 255.0.0.0 {
+	host myclient {
+		filename "netboot";
+		option root-path "/export/myclient/root";
+		hardware ethernet 00:02:56:00:73:31;
+		fixed-address 10.42.42.42;
+	}
+}
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Note that procedures for AMD64 and i386 clients vary somewhat.
+See
+.Xr pxeboot 8
+for more detailed information.
+.Pp
+Architectures using the HP remote boot server
+(HP 300 or older HPPA)
+should ensure that the general purpose
+boot program is installed in the directory
+.Pa /usr/mdec/rbootd .
+.Pp
+Architectures using MOP
+(older Alpha)
+should follow the instructions in
+.Xr mopd 8
+for setting up a TFTP boot.
+.It
+Add myclient to the bootparams database
+.Pa /etc/bootparams :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+myclient  root=server:/export/myclient/root \e
+          swap=server:/export/myclient/swap
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Note that some bootparam servers are somewhat sensitive.
+Some require fully qualified hostnames or partially qualified hostnames
+(which can be solved by having both fully and partially qualified entries).
+Other servers are case sensitive.
+.It
+Build the swap file for myclient:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# mkdir -p /export/myclient/root/swap
+# cd /export/myclient
+# dd if=/dev/zero of=swap bs=1m count=120
+.Ed
+.Pp
+This creates a 120 Megabyte swap file and an empty /swap directory.
+A smaller swap file may be created if the boot is for
+maintenance (i.e. temporary) purposes only.
+.It
+Populate myclient's root
+filesystem on the server.
+How this is done depends on the client architecture and the version of the
+.Ox
+distribution.
+It can be as simple as copying and modifying the server's root
+filesystem, or perhaps the files can be taken from the
+standard binary distribution.
+.It
+Export the required filesystems in
+.Pa /etc/exports :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+/usr -ro myclient
+/export/myclient -maproot=root -alldirs myclient
+.Ed
+.Pp
+If the server and client are of the same architecture, then the client
+can share the server's
+.Pa /usr
+filesystem (as is done above).
+If not, a properly fleshed out
+.Pa /usr
+partition will have to be built for the client in some other place.
+.It
+Copy and customize at least the following files in
+.Pa /export/myclient/root :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# cd /export/myclient/root/etc
+# cp /etc/fstab fstab
+# cp /etc/hosts hosts
+# echo myclient > myname
+# echo inet 192.197.96.12 > hostname.le0
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Note that "le0" above should be replaced with the name of
+the network interface that the client will use for booting.
+.It
+Correct at least
+the critical mount points in the client's
+.Xr fstab 5
+(which will be
+.Pa /export/myclient/root/etc/fstab ) :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+myserver:/export/myclient/root / nfs rw 0 0
+myserver:/export/myclient/swap none swap sw,nfsmntpt=/swap
+myserver:/export/myclient/root/usr /usr nfs rw,nodev 0 0
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The above example works even if
+.Pa /usr
+is not on a separate partition.
+It allows them to be mounted with NFSv3,
+if the server allows it,
+and to specify per-partition mount options,
+such as
+.Cm nodev .
+.Pp
+If the
+.Pa /usr
+partition is to be shared between machines,
+as in the example
+.Pa /etc/exports
+above, a more suitable entry might be:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+myserver:/usr /usr nfs ro 0 0
+.Ed
+.It
+Make sure the correct processes are enabled on the server.
+See
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+for details of how to start these processes at boot.
+.Pp
+For all clients:
+.Xr mountd 8 ,
+.Xr nfsd 8 ,
+.Xr portmap 8 ,
+.Xr rarpd 8 ,
+and
+.Xr rpc.bootparamd 8 .
+.Pp
+For alpha, amd64, hppa, i386, and sparc64 clients:
+.Xr tftpd 8
+.Pp
+For HP 300 and older HPPA clients:
+.Xr rbootd 8
+.Pp
+For newer alpha, amd64, hppa, and i386 clients:
+.Xr dhcpd 8
+.Pp
+For older alpha clients:
+.Xr mopd 8
+.It
+Net boot the client.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/usr/mdec/rbootdXX" -compact
+.It Pa /etc/bootparams
+Client root and swap pathnames.
+.It Pa /etc/dhcpd.conf
+DHCP daemon configuration file.
+.It Pa /etc/ethers
+Ethernet addresses of known clients.
+.It Pa /etc/exports
+Exported NFS mount points.
+.It Pa /etc/fstab
+Static information about the filesystems.
+.It Pa /etc/hostname.$if
+Interface-specific configuration file.
+.It Pa /etc/hosts
+Host name database.
+.It Pa /etc/myname
+Default hostname.
+.It Pa /etc/mygate
+Default gateway.
+.It Pa /etc/rbootd.conf
+Configuration file for HP Remote Boot Daemon.
+.It Pa /tftpboot
+Location of boot programs loaded by the Sun PROM.
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/rbootd
+Location of boot programs loaded by the HP Boot ROM.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr bootparams 5 ,
+.Xr dhcpd.conf 5 ,
+.Xr ethers 5 ,
+.Xr exports 5 ,
+.Xr fstab 5 ,
+.Xr hostname.if 5 ,
+.Xr hosts 5 ,
+.Xr mygate 5 ,
+.Xr myname 5 ,
+.Xr dhcpd 8 ,
+.Xr mopd 8 ,
+.Xr mountd 8 ,
+.Xr nfsd 8 ,
+.Xr portmap 8 ,
+.Xr pxeboot 8 ,
+.Xr rarpd 8 ,
+.Xr rbootd 8 ,
+.Xr rpc.bootparamd 8 ,
+.Xr tcpdump 8 ,
+.Xr tftpd 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/genassym.sh.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/genassym.sh.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ab34b0e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/genassym.sh.8
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: genassym.sh.8,v 1.9 2015/03/13 19:58:41 jmc Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: genassym.sh.8,v 1.5 1999/03/17 20:31:19 garbled Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Matthias Pfaller.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: March 13 2015 $
+.Dt GENASSYM.SH 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm genassym.sh
+.Nd emit an assym.h file
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm sh genassym.sh
+.Op Fl c
+.Ar C compiler invocation
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm
+is a shell script normally used during the kernel build process to
+create an assym.h file.
+This file defines a number of cpp constants derived from the configuration
+information
+.Nm
+reads from stdin.
+The generated file is used by kernel sources
+written in assembler to gain access to information (e.g. structure
+offsets and sizes) normally only known to the C compiler.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+resides in the
+.Pa /sys/kern
+directory.
+Arguments to
+.Nm
+are usually of the form
+.Ar ${CC} ${CFLAGS} ${CPPFLAGS}
+where
+.Ar ${CC}
+is the C compiler used to compile the kernel, while
+.Ar ${CFLAGS}
+and
+.Ar ${CPPFLAGS}
+are flag arguments to the C compiler.
+The script creates a C source file from its input.
+Then the C compiler is called according to the script's arguments
+to compile this file.
+.Pp
+Normally
+.Nm
+instructs the C compiler to create an assembler source from the constructed
+C source.
+The resulting file is then processed to extract the information
+needed to create the assym.h file.
+The
+.Fl c
+flag instructs
+.Nm
+to create slightly different code, generate an executable from this code
+and run it.
+In both cases the assym.h file is written to stdout.
+.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
+Either self-explanatory, or generated by one of the programs
+called from the script.
+The script will exit with the return code from the compiler or, in the
+.Fl c
+case, with the return code from the generated executable.
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr genassym.cf 5
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+script first appeared in
+.Ox 2.2 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/intro.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/intro.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b7f8c71e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/intro.8
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: intro.8,v 1.29 2019/05/26 00:52:22 naddy Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: intro.8,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:36:24 jtc Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"	@(#)intro.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 12/11/93
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 26 2019 $
+.Dt INTRO 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm intro
+.Nd introduction to system maintenance and operation commands
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The manual pages in section 8 contain information related to
+system operation and maintenance.
+They describe commands concerning file systems,
+such as
+.Xr edquota 8 ,
+.Xr fsck 8 ,
+.Xr mount 8 ,
+and
+.Xr newfs 8 .
+They also cover commands concerning system backup/recovery, such as
+.Xr dump 8
+and
+.Xr restore 8 .
+.Pp
+There are pages which document the running of the system, such as
+.Xr afterboot 8 ,
+.Xr ifconfig 8 ,
+.Xr security 8 ,
+and the configuration files located in
+.Pa /etc .
+Procedures concerning system failure are documented in
+.Xr crash 8 .
+.Pp
+Section 8 pages also describe network services and daemons.
+The rest of this page discusses some of the main daemons
+available on the
+.Ox
+system,
+and how to enable/disable them.
+.Pp
+System daemons are controlled by the script
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+which is in turn configured by
+.Xr rc.conf 8 .
+For example the HTTP daemon
+.Xr httpd 8
+is controlled by the following line from
+.Xr rc.conf 8 :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+httpd_flags=NO
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Thus it is not started by default.
+To enable or disable daemon processes,
+administrators should edit the file
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8
+or use the
+.Xr rcctl 8
+utility.
+The
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8
+file overrides variable assignments in
+.Xr rc.conf 8 .
+So to enable
+.Xr httpd 8 ,
+the following line might be added to
+.Pa /etc/rc.conf.local :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+httpd_flags="-v"
+.Ed
+.Pp
+As can be seen above,
+this method is also used to specify additional options.
+.Pp
+Below is a list of some of the daemons available.
+For further information, see
+.Xr rc 8
+and the individual pages for the utilities.
+.Ss Automounter daemon (amd)
+If using the
+.Xr amd 8
+daemon,
+go into the
+.Pa /etc/amd
+directory and set it up by
+renaming
+.Pa master.sample
+to
+.Pa master
+and editing it and creating other maps as needed.
+Alternatively, you can get your maps with YP.
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va amd_flags
+and
+.Va amd_master .
+.Ss DNS server
+If you are using a name server, check the
+.Pa /etc/resolv.conf
+file.
+It may look something like:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+domain nts.umn.edu
+nameserver 128.101.101.101
+nameserver 134.84.84.84
+search nts.umn.edu. umn.edu.
+lookup file bind
+.Ed
+.Pp
+If using a caching name server, add the line "nameserver 127.0.0.1" first.
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va nsd_flags
+and
+.Va unbound_flags .
+.Ss Clock synchronisation
+In order to make sure the system clock is correct,
+it may be synchronised with a number of external sources.
+The utilities available are:
+.Xr ntpd 8
+and
+.Xr rdate 8 .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va ntpd_flags .
+.Ss BOOTP/DHCP server
+If this is a
+BOOTP or DHCP
+server, edit
+.Pa /etc/dhcpd.conf
+as needed.
+See also
+.Xr diskless 8 .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va bootparamd_flags ,
+.Va dhcpd_flags ,
+and
+.Va dhcrelay_flags .
+.Ss HP remote boot server
+Edit
+.Pa /etc/rbootd.conf
+if needed for remote booting.
+If you do not have HP computers doing remote booting, do not enable this.
+See also
+.Xr diskless 8 .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va rbootd_flags .
+.Ss httpd web server (HTTP)
+On
+.Ox
+it will
+.Xr chroot 2
+to
+.Pa /var/www .
+Detailed information is available in
+.Xr httpd 8
+and
+.Xr httpd.conf 5 .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va httpd_flags .
+.Ss NFS server
+If this is an NFS server,
+edit
+.Pa /etc/exports .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va mountd_flags
+and
+.Va nfsd_flags .
+.Ss Relay Daemon
+A relay daemon,
+.Xr relayd 8 ,
+able to run as a
+load-balancer, application layer gateway, or transparent proxy.
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va relayd_flags .
+.Ss Routing Daemons
+Various daemons for managing routing tables are available:
+.Xr bgpd 8 ,
+.Xr eigrpd 8 ,
+.Xr ospfd 8 ,
+and
+.Xr ripd 8 .
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va bgpd_flags ,
+.Va eigrpd_flags ,
+.Va ospfd_flags ,
+and
+.Va ripd_flags .
+.Ss RPC-based network services
+Several services depend on the RPC portmapper,
+.Xr portmap 8 ,
+being running for proper operation.
+This includes YP and NFS exports, among other services.
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va portmap_flags .
+.Ss YP setup
+Check the YP domain name with the
+.Xr domainname 1
+command.
+If necessary, correct it by editing the
+.Pa /etc/defaultdomain
+file (see
+.Xr defaultdomain 5 ) .
+The
+.Pa /etc/netstart
+script reads this file on boot to determine and set the domain name.
+You may also set the running system's domain name with the
+.Xr domainname 1
+command.
+.Pp
+Relevant
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+variables:
+.Va ypbind_flags .
+.Pp
+After starting YP client services, perform the remaining YP activation
+as described in
+.Xr passwd 5
+and
+.Xr group 5 .
+.Pp
+In particular, to enable YP passwd support, you'll need to add the following
+line to
+.Pa /etc/master.passwd :
+.Pp
+.Dl +:*::::::::
+.Pp
+You do this by using
+.Xr vipw 8 .
+.Pp
+There are many more YP man pages available to help you.
+You can find more information by starting with
+.Xr yp 8 .
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr afterboot 8 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr rcctl 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+An
+.Nm intro
+manual for section 8 appeared in
+.Bx 4.2 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d97b634d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.85 2025/09/29 01:02:58 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.alpha/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.79 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 alpha
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The alpha supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on alpha.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar fd*
+Floppy disk drives (3 1/2", 5 1/4"), see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.It Ar ttyc*
+Cyclades serial ports, see
+.Xr cy 4 .
+.It Ar ttyB*
+DEC 3000 serial ports, see
+.Xr zs 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar lpa*
+Polled printer port, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar speaker
+PC speaker, see
+.Xr spkr 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e160c60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_alpha.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/boot_alpha.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/boot_alpha.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6eb7b39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.alpha/boot_alpha.8
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_alpha.8,v 1.17 2023/03/13 20:32:28 miod Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2002, Miodrag Vallat.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.Dd $Mdocdate: March 13 2023 $
+.Dt BOOT_ALPHA 8 alpha
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_alpha
+.Nd Alpha system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss Cold starts
+When powered on, the SRM firmware will proceed to its initialization, and
+will boot an operating system if the
+.Em auto_action
+variable is set to
+.Dq boot
+or
+.Dq restart ,
+or will wait for interactive commands if set to
+.Dq halt .
+.Ss Warm starts
+After a panic, or if the system is rebooted via
+.Xr reboot 8
+or
+.Xr shutdown 8 ,
+the SRM console will only restart the system if the
+.Em auto_action
+variable is set to
+.Dq boot .
+.Ss Boot process options
+The SRM console will attempt to boot from the device listed in the
+.Em bootdef_dev
+variable.
+A list of the recognized SRM devices can be obtained with the command
+.Ic show dev
+at the SRM prompt.
+.Pp
+The
+.Ox
+alpha boot loader program is extensively described in a separate document,
+.Xr boot 8 .
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+In case of system crashes, the kernel will usually enter the kernel
+debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+unless it is not present in the kernel, or it is disabled via the
+.Em ddb.panic
+sysctl.
+Upon leaving ddb, or if ddb was not entered, the kernel will halt the system
+if it was still in device configuration phase, or attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device, if possible.
+The crash dump will then be recovered by
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle.
+It is also possible to force other behaviours from ddb.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/netboot -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/bootxx
+primary bootstrap for
+.Dq ffs
+file system
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/boot
+secondary bootstrap (usually also installed as
+.Pa /boot )
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/netboot
+network bootstrap
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr boot 8 ,
+.Xr boot_config 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr setnetbootinfo 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
+.Rs
+.%T "Alpha Architecture Reference Manual Third Edition"
+.%Q "Alpha Architecture Committee"
+.%I "Digital Press"
+.%D 1998
+.Re
+.Sh BUGS
+The device names used by
+.Ox Ns / Ns alpha
+and the
+.Tn SRM Console
+often have no relation to each other.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a32b0c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,317 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.99 2025/09/29 01:02:58 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.amd64/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.85 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 amd64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The amd64 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on amd64.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar fd*
+Floppy disk drives (3 1/2", 5 1/4"), see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.It Ar ttyc*
+Cyclades serial ports, see
+.Xr cy 4 .
+.It Ar ttyVI*
+Virtio serial ports, see
+.Xr viocon 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar lpa*
+Polled printer port, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power Management Interface, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar efi
+EFI runtime services, see
+.Xr efi 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar ipmi*
+IPMI BMC access, see
+.Xr ipmi 4 .
+.It Ar nvram
+NVRAM access, see
+.Xr nvram 4 .
+.It Ar kcov
+Kernel code coverage tracing, see
+.Xr kcov 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pctr*
+PC Performance Tuning Register access device, see
+.Xr pctr 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar speaker
+PC speaker, see
+.Xr spkr 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vmm
+Virtual Machine Monitor, see
+.Xr vmm 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar pvbus*
+paravirtual device tree root, see
+.Xr pvbus 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.It Ar psp
+Platform Security Processor, see
+.Xr psp 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e8fe087c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_amd64.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/boot_amd64.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/boot_amd64.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6c6926a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.amd64/boot_amd64.8
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_amd64.8,v 1.9 2016/02/25 09:43:52 tb Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Tobias Weingartner
+.\"
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: February 25 2016 $
+.Dt BOOT_AMD64 8 amd64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_amd64
+.Nd amd64 system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss Cold starts
+The
+.Tn Athlon64
+computers and clones will perform a POST (Power On Self Test) upon
+being booted cold.
+This test will find and initialize memory, keyboard, and other devices.
+It will search for and initialize any extension ROMs that are present,
+and then attempt to boot the operating system from an available boot
+drive.
+.Pp
+The boot drive is usually specified in the BIOS setup.
+.Ss Warm starts
+The BIOS loads the first block (at physical location: track 0, head 0,
+sector 1) off the boot device into memory, and if the last two bytes in the
+block match the signature 0xAA55, the BIOS considers the block a valid
+bootable drive.
+The BIOS then proceeds to call the machine code program in this block.
+If the BIOS is current, it will also pass the boot drive
+to the boot block in register %dl.
+.Pp
+There are two different types of boot blocks on devices.
+There is the
+MBR (master boot record) and the PBR (partition boot record).
+A digression
+into a little piece of history will quickly give light as to why this is so.
+In the beginning, the PC
+.Dq architecture
+came with single or dual floppy
+drives, and no hard drives.
+The only type of bootable sectors on any device were the PBRs.
+They were responsible for loading the rest of the operating
+system from the correct device.
+When hard disks came out, it was felt that
+such a huge space should be able to be partitioned into separate drives,
+and this is when the MBR was invented.
+.Pp
+The MBR relocates itself upon being loaded and invoked by the BIOS.
+Embedded within the MBR is a partition table, with four partition table
+entries.
+The MBR code traverses this table (which was loaded with the
+MBR by the BIOS), looking for an active entry, and then loads the MBR or
+PBR from the disk location specified by the partition table entry.
+So in reality, the MBR is nothing more than a fancy chaining PBR.
+.Pp
+Note: The MBR could load another MBR, which is the case when you are booting
+off an extended partition.
+In other words, the first block of an extended
+partition is really an MBR, which will then load the corresponding MBR or PBR
+out of its extended partition's partition table.
+.Ss Geometry translation
+.Em WARNING :
+This portion of the
+.Dq PC BIOS Architecture
+is a mess, and a compatibility nightmare.
+.Pp
+The PC BIOS has an API to manipulate any disk that the BIOS happens to
+support.
+This interface uses 10 bits to address the cylinder, 8 bits to
+address the head, and 6 bits to address the sector of a drive.
+This restricts any application using the BIOS to being able to address only
+1024 cylinders, 256 heads, and 63 (since the sectors are 1 based) sectors
+on a disk.
+These limitations proved to be fine for roughly 3 years after
+the debut of hard disks on PC computers.
+.Pp
+Many (if not all) newer drives have many more cylinders than the BIOS API
+can support, and likely more sectors per track as well.
+To allow the BIOS the ability of accessing these large drives, the BIOS would
+.Dq re-map
+the
+cylinder/head/sector of the real drive geometry into something that would
+allow the applications using the BIOS to access a larger portion of the
+drive, still using the restricted BIOS API.
+.Pp
+The reason this has become a problem is that any modern OS will use its own
+drivers to access the disk drive, bypassing the BIOS completely.
+However,
+the MBR, PBR, and partition tables are all still written using the original
+BIOS access methods.
+This is for backwards compatibility to the original IBM PC!
+.Pp
+So the gist of it is, the MBR, PBR, and partition table need to have BIOS
+geometry offsets and cylinder/head/sector values for them to be able to
+load any type of operating system.
+This geometry can, and likely will,
+change whenever you move a disk from machine to machine, or from controller
+to controller.
+.Em They are controller and machine specific .
+.Ss Boot process options
+On most
+.Ox
+systems, booting
+.Ox
+from the BIOS will load the
+.Ox Ns -specific
+first-stage bootstrap,
+.Xr biosboot 8 ,
+which in turn will locate and load the second-stage bootstrap,
+.Xr boot 8 .
+Other bootstrapping software may be used, and can chain-load the
+.Ox
+bootstrapping code, or directly load the kernel.
+In the latter case, refer to your bootloader documentation to know which
+options are available.
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+In case of system crashes, the kernel will usually enter the kernel
+debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+unless it is not present in the kernel, or it is disabled via the
+.Em ddb.panic
+sysctl.
+Upon leaving ddb, or if ddb was not entered, the kernel will halt the system
+if it was still in device configuration phase, or attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device, if possible.
+The crash dump will then be recovered by
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle.
+It is also possible to force other behaviours from ddb.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/biosboot -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.sp
+single processor capable kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.mp
+multiprocessor capable kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/mbr
+system MBR image
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/biosboot
+system primary stage bootstrap (PBR)
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/boot
+system second stage bootstrap (usually also installed as
+.Pa /boot )
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/pxeboot
+PXE bootstrap
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr biosboot 8 ,
+.Xr boot 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr pxeboot 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
+.Sh BUGS
+The
+.Dq PC BIOS Architecture
+makes this process very prone to weird and
+wonderful interactions between different operating systems.
+.Pp
+There is no published standard to the MBR and PBR,
+which makes coding these a nightmare.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..363978d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,278 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.17 2025/09/29 01:02:58 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.arm64/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.18 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 arm64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The arm64 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on arm64.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power Management Interface, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar efi
+EFI runtime services, see
+.Xr efi 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar ipmi*
+IPMI BMC access, see
+.Xr ipmi 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.arm64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..46187e7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.24 2025/09/29 01:02:58 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.armv7/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.23 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 armv7
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The armv7 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on armv7.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power management device, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.armv7/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fcb4e6a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.79 2025/09/29 01:02:58 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.hppa/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.71 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 hppa
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The hppa supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on hppa.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar fd*
+Floppy disk drives (3 1/2", 5 1/4"), see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pdc
+PDC device, see
+.Xr pdc 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..730e61ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_hppa.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/boot_hppa.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/boot_hppa.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..70d0eeb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.hppa/boot_hppa.8
@@ -0,0 +1,347 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_hppa.8,v 1.15 2022/09/05 10:29:27 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2002, Miodrag Vallat.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 5 2022 $
+.Dt BOOT_HPPA 8 hppa
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_hppa
+.Nd hppa system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss System starts
+When powered on, after a panic, or if the system is rebooted via
+.Xr reboot 8
+or
+.Xr shutdown 8 ,
+the hppa firmware
+.Pq Dq PDC
+will proceed to its initialization, and will boot an operating system
+if autoboot is enabled.
+.\"
+.Ss Boot process description
+System boot blocks are provided as a
+.Dq LIF
+.Pq Logical Interchange Format
+archive, either on a disk device, or via the network, using the
+.Em bootp
+or
+.Em rboot
+protocols, depending on the PDC version.
+A small
+.Xr mkboot 8
+utility
+is provided for combining primary boot and a number
+of images (OS kernels or standalone binaries)
+into one
+.Dq LIF
+volume suitable for booting.
+.Ss PDC concepts
+If autoboot is enabled, the PDC will attempt to boot from the specified
+.Dq boot path
+value.
+If no
+.Dq boot path
+has been specified, the PDC will then scan for bootable devices and
+boot from the first found, after a few seconds allowing the user to
+interrupt the boot process.
+If autoboot is disabled, the PDC will enter interactive mode, after an
+optional device scan.
+In all cases, it is possible to enter interactive mode by holding the
+escape key during the selftests, or when prompted to do so to abort
+the current operation, unless the PDC has been configured in
+.Dq secure mode .
+.\"
+.Ss ISL interaction
+.Dq ISL
+stands for
+.Dq Initial System Loader
+and is the
+.Xr boot 8
+program in
+.Ox .
+On all versions of the PDC except for the 712 and 725 models the
+.Dq boot
+command (see below) will be followed by the question:
+.Dq Interact with IPL (Y, N, or Cancel)?>
+where a positive answer will invoke an interactive prompt in the
+.Xr boot 8
+program later and negative will thus suppress it.
+A cancellation will abort the boot process.
+.Pp
+On the 712 and 725 models firmware an additional
+.Dq isl
+argument should be given to the
+.Dq boot
+command to invoke the
+.Xr boot 8
+interactive prompt.
+With the default behaviour being a non-interactive boot process.
+.\"
+.Ss Old PDC operation
+This version is used on the following models:
+705, 7x0, 715/33/50/75, 725/50/75, 735, 755.
+There are two levels of interactive commands in this version.
+The first level is a short menu:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+b)   Boot from specified device
+s)   Search for bootable device
+a)   Enter Boot Administration mode
+x)   Exit and continue boot sequence
+
+Select from menu:
+.Ed
+.Pp
+which provides the following commands:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "XXX" -offset indent -compact
+.It Cm b
+boot from a device found during the scan,
+either with its short
+.Dq P#
+form, or a complete name specification.
+For example, to boot from the
+.Tn SCSI
+disk with id 6 off the built-in (first) controller,
+one would enter
+.Ic b Ar scsi.6.0 .
+.It Cm s
+rescan for bootable devices.
+.It Cm a
+enter the second part of interactive mode.
+.It Cm x
+resume an interrupted boot sequence.
+.El
+.Pp
+The
+.Dq Boot Administration
+mode, recognizable with its
+.Em BOOT_ADMIN>
+prompt, controls the various boot options.
+The complete list of commands depends on the machine and PDC version.
+The following list only mentions commands impacting the boot process.
+.Bl -tag -width AUTOSELECT -offset indent
+.It AUTOSELECT
+Displays or changes the autoboot setting.
+If autoselect is set to
+.Dq on ,
+the PDC will always attempt to boot the first bootable device found in
+this order:
+.Bl -enum -offset indent -compact
+.It
+Boot device
+.Em path
+setting.
+.It
+.Tn SCSI
+devices connected to the built-in
+.Tn SCSI
+controller,
+the highest ID numbers being preferred.
+.It
+Network
+.Em rboot
+server (see also
+.Xr rbootd 8 ) .
+.It
+Other
+.Tn SCSI
+devices connected to secondary controllers,
+the highest ID numbers being preferred.
+.El
+If the
+.Em primary path
+setting defines a bootable device, no device scan will occur.
+.It BOOT
+Boots off the specified device.
+It is similar to the
+.Ic b
+command from the short menu above.
+The
+.Dq primary
+and
+.Dq alternate
+path settings may be booted with
+.Ic boot Ar pri
+and
+.Ic boot Ar alt
+respectively.
+.It PATH
+Displays or changes the boot and console devices.
+The boot device is defined as the
+.Dq primary
+path, and another setting may be stored as the
+.Dq alternate
+path for rescue purposes.
+For example, to define the primary boot path to the
+.Tn SCSI
+disk with ID 5 connected to the built-in controller, one would enter
+.Ic path primary Ar scsi.5
+.Pp
+When invoked without parameters,
+.Ic path
+will list the various path settings.
+.El
+.\"
+.Ss Modern PDC operation
+Machines equipped with 7100LC, 7200 or 7300LC CPU types are
+usually blessed with a different kind of PDC.
+There is only one interactive mode, with a
+.Em BOOT_ADMIN>
+prompt, which provides both boot settings and commands.
+The complete list of commands depends on the machine and PDC version.
+The following list only mentions commands impacting the boot process.
+.Bl -tag -width auto\ search -offset indent
+.It Ic auto boot
+Displays or changes the autoboot setting.
+If
+.Ic auto boot
+is set to
+.Dq on ,
+the PDC will always attempt to boot.
+The booted device chosen will depend on the
+.Ic auto search
+setting.
+.It Ic auto search
+Displays or changes the device scan setting.
+If
+.Ic auto search
+is set to
+.Dq on ,
+the PDC will attempt to boot the first bootable device found in
+this order:
+.Bl -enum -offset indent -compact
+.It
+Boot device
+.Em path
+setting.
+.It
+.Tn SCSI
+devices connected to the built-in
+.Tn SCSI
+controller,
+the highest ID numbers being preferred.
+.It
+Network
+.Em bootp
+server (see also
+.Xr dhcpd 8 ) .
+.It
+Other
+.Tn SCSI
+devices connected to secondary controllers,
+the highest ID numbers being preferred.
+.El
+If
+.Ic auto search
+is set to
+.Dq off
+and the primary boot path points to a bootable device,
+no device scan will occur.
+.Pp
+Note that setting
+.Ic auto search
+to
+.Dq on
+will force autoboot, regardless of the
+.Ic auto boot
+value.
+.It Ic boot
+Boots off the specified device.
+The
+.Dq primary
+and
+.Dq alternate
+path settings may be booted with
+.Ic boot Ar pri
+and
+.Ic boot Ar alt
+respectively.
+.It Ic path
+Displays or changes the boot and console devices.
+The boot device is defined as the
+.Dq primary
+path, and another setting may be stored as the
+.Dq alternate
+path for rescue purposes.
+For example, to define the primary boot path to the
+.Tn SCSI
+disk with ID 5 connected to the built-in controller, one would enter
+.Ic path pri Ar scsi.5 .
+.Pp
+When invoked without parameters,
+.Ic path
+will list the various path settings.
+.El
+.\"
+.Ss Boot process options
+The
+.Ox
+hppa boot loader program is extensively described in a separate document,
+.Xr boot 8 .
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+If the system crashes, it will enter the kernel debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+if it is configured in the kernel.
+If the crash occurred during
+initialization and the debugger is not present or is exited, the
+kernel will halt the system.
+If the crash occurred during normal operation and the debugger
+is not present or is exited, the system will attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device (which will be automatically recovered with
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle), and after the dump is complete
+(successful or not) the kernel will attempt a reboot.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/xxbootxx -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa boot.lif
+network bootstrap and kernel combined image
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/cdboot
+primary bootstrap for
+.Dq cd9660
+file system
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/xxboot
+primary bootstrap for
+.Dq ffs
+file system
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/boot
+system bootstrap (usually also installed as
+.Pa /boot )
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr boot 8 ,
+.Xr dhcpd 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr rbootd 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..48bd00b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.124 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.i386/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.97 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 i386
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The i386 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on i386.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar fd*
+Floppy disk drives (3 1/2", 5 1/4"), see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.It Ar ttyc*
+Cyclades serial ports, see
+.Xr cy 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar lpa*
+Polled printer port, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar amdmsr
+AMD MSR access device, see
+.Xr amdmsr 4 .
+.It Ar apm
+Power management device, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar ipmi*
+IPMI BMC access, see
+.Xr ipmi 4 .
+.It Ar joy*
+Joystick driver, see
+.Xr joy 4 .
+.It Ar kcov
+Kernel code coverage tracing, see
+.Xr kcov 4 .
+.It Ar nvram
+NVRAM access, see
+.Xr nvram 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pctr*
+PC Performance Tuning Register access device, see
+.Xr pctr 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar speaker
+PC speaker, see
+.Xr spkr 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar pvbus*
+paravirtual device tree root, see
+.Xr pvbus 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8f6bf9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_i386.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/boot_i386.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/boot_i386.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..793d2141
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.i386/boot_i386.8
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_i386.8,v 1.17 2016/02/25 09:43:52 tb Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Tobias Weingartner
+.\"
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: February 25 2016 $
+.Dt BOOT_I386 8 i386
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_i386
+.Nd i386 system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss Cold starts
+The
+.Tn IBM PC
+computers and clones will perform a POST (Power On Self Test) upon
+being booted cold.
+This test will find and initialize memory, keyboard, and other devices.
+It will search for and initialize any extension ROMs that are present,
+and then attempt to boot the operating system from an available boot
+drive.
+.Pp
+The boot drive is usually specified in the BIOS setup.
+.Ss Warm starts
+The BIOS loads the first block (at physical location: track 0, head 0,
+sector 1) off the boot device into memory, and if the last two bytes in the
+block match the signature 0xAA55, the BIOS considers the block a valid
+bootable drive.
+The BIOS then proceeds to call the machine code program in this block.
+If the BIOS is current, it will also pass the boot drive
+to the boot block in register %dl.
+.Pp
+There are two different types of boot blocks on devices.
+There is the
+MBR (master boot record) and the PBR (partition boot record).
+A digression
+into a little piece of history will quickly give light as to why this is so.
+In the beginning, the PC
+.Dq architecture
+came with single or dual floppy
+drives, and no hard drives.
+The only type of bootable sectors on any device were the PBRs.
+They were responsible for loading the rest of the operating
+system from the correct device.
+When hard disks came out, it was felt that
+such a huge space should be able to be partitioned into separate drives,
+and this is when the MBR was invented.
+.Pp
+The MBR relocates itself upon being loaded and invoked by the BIOS.
+Embedded within the MBR is a partition table, with four partition table
+entries.
+The MBR code traverses this table (which was loaded with the
+MBR by the BIOS), looking for an active entry, and then loads the MBR or
+PBR from the disk location specified by the partition table entry.
+So in reality, the MBR is nothing more than a fancy chaining PBR.
+.Pp
+Note: The MBR could load another MBR, which is the case when you are booting
+off an extended partition.
+In other words, the first block of an extended
+partition is really an MBR, which will then load the corresponding MBR or PBR
+out of its extended partition's partition table.
+.Ss Geometry translation
+.Em WARNING :
+This portion of the
+.Dq PC BIOS Architecture
+is a mess, and a compatibility nightmare.
+.Pp
+The PC BIOS has an API to manipulate any disk that the BIOS happens to
+support.
+This interface uses 10 bits to address the cylinder, 8 bits to
+address the head, and 6 bits to address the sector of a drive.
+This restricts any application using the BIOS to being able to address only
+1024 cylinders, 256 heads, and 63 (since the sectors are 1 based) sectors
+on a disk.
+These limitations proved to be fine for roughly 3 years after
+the debut of hard disks on PC computers.
+.Pp
+Many (if not all) newer drives have many more cylinders than the BIOS API
+can support, and likely more sectors per track as well.
+To allow the BIOS the ability of accessing these large drives, the BIOS would
+.Dq re-map
+the
+cylinder/head/sector of the real drive geometry into something that would
+allow the applications using the BIOS to access a larger portion of the
+drive, still using the restricted BIOS API.
+.Pp
+The reason this has become a problem is that any modern OS will use its own
+drivers to access the disk drive, bypassing the BIOS completely.
+However,
+the MBR, PBR, and partition tables are all still written using the original
+BIOS access methods.
+This is for backwards compatibility to the original IBM PC!
+.Pp
+So the gist of it is, the MBR, PBR, and partition table need to have BIOS
+geometry offsets and cylinder/head/sector values for them to be able to
+load any type of operating system.
+This geometry can, and likely will,
+change whenever you move a disk from machine to machine, or from controller
+to controller.
+.Em They are controller and machine specific .
+.Ss Boot process options
+On most
+.Ox
+systems, booting
+.Ox
+from the BIOS will load the
+.Ox Ns -specific
+first-stage bootstrap,
+.Xr biosboot 8 ,
+which in turn will locate and load the second-stage bootstrap,
+.Xr boot 8 .
+Other bootstrapping software may be used, and can chain-load the
+.Ox
+bootstrapping code, or directly load the kernel.
+In the latter case, refer to your bootloader documentation to know which
+options are available.
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+In case of system crashes, the kernel will usually enter the kernel
+debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+unless it is not present in the kernel, or it is disabled via the
+.Em ddb.panic
+sysctl.
+Upon leaving ddb, or if ddb was not entered, the kernel will halt the system
+if it was still in device configuration phase, or attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device, if possible.
+The crash dump will then be recovered by
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle.
+It is also possible to force other behaviours from ddb.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/biosboot -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.sp
+single processor capable kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.mp
+multiprocessor capable kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/mbr
+system MBR image
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/biosboot
+system primary stage bootstrap (PBR)
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/boot
+system second stage bootstrap (usually also installed as
+.Pa /boot )
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/pxeboot
+PXE bootstrap
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr biosboot 8 ,
+.Xr boot 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr pxeboot 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
+.Sh BUGS
+The
+.Dq PC BIOS Architecture
+makes this process very prone to weird and
+wonderful interactions between different operating systems.
+.Pp
+There is no published standard to the MBR and PBR,
+which makes coding these a nightmare.
+.\" .Pp
+.\" Somebody *please* write me a decent BIOS, and make them (the masses) use it!
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5ed9b76c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.58 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.landisk/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.53 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 landisk
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The landisk supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on landisk.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttya
+on-board serial port, see
+.Xr scif 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.landisk/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84c4521c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.45 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.loongson/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.39 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 loongson
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The loongson supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on loongson.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power management device, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.loongson/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f968aad6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.58 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.luna88k/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.38 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 luna88k
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The luna88k supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on luna88k.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttya
+On-board serial console port, see
+.Xr sio 4 .
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar lcd
+front panel LCD display, see
+.Xr lcd 4 .
+.It Ar pcex*
+PC-9801 extension board slot, see
+.Xr pcexmem 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar xp
+HD647180 I/O processor, see
+.Xr xp 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b9b64d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_luna88k.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/boot_luna88k.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/boot_luna88k.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b289d64c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.luna88k/boot_luna88k.8
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_luna88k.8,v 1.8 2023/01/12 19:37:53 miod Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistribution of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: January 12 2023 $
+.Dt BOOT_LUNA88K 8 luna88k
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_luna88k
+.Nd luna88k system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss Boot process description
+When powered on, or after a system reboot, the luna88k ROM monitor will
+proceed to its initialization, and will boot the operating system
+configured in nvram if autoboot is enabled.
+.Ss DIP switches description
+The behaviour of the ROM monitor, as well as some kernel options, are
+controlled through the SW1 set of DIP switches on the front panel.
+.Pp
+The switch positions are not the same on LUNA-88K and LUNA-88K2 models.
+On LUNA-88K, a switch is enabled when in the
+.Em down
+position, while on the LUNA-88K2, a switch is enabled when in the
+.Em up
+position.
+.Pp
+The following SW1 switches alter the ROM monitor behaviour:
+.Bl -column "Switch" "interact with ROM monitor" "Disabled"
+.It Sy Switch Ta Sy Enabled Ta Sy Disabled
+.It Li 1 Ta "interact with ROM monitor" Ta "auto-boot"
+.It Li 2 Ta "serial console" Ta "graphics console"
+.El
+.Pp
+The following switches alter the kernel behaviour:
+.Bl -column "Switch" "interact with ROM monitor" "Disabled"
+.It Sy Switch Ta Sy Enabled Ta Sy Disabled
+.It Li 1 Ta "boot in single-user mode" Ta "boot in multi-user mode"
+.It Li 3 Ta "prompt for root device" Ta "do not prompt for root device"
+.It Li 4 Ta "enter UKC mode" Ta "do not enter UKC mode"
+.El
+Note that the same behaviour can be used by passing the
+.Fl s ,
+.Fl a ,
+and
+.Fl c
+options respectively in the boot loader, rather than using the switches.
+.Pp
+For more details about the
+.Dq User Kernel Configuration
+mode
+.Pq UKC ,
+see
+.Xr boot_config 8 .
+.Pp
+Note that the first switch controls both the kernel and the ROM monitor
+behaviour.
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+In case of system crashes, the kernel will usually enter the kernel
+debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+unless it is not present in the kernel, or it is disabled via the
+.Em ddb.panic
+sysctl.
+Upon leaving ddb, or if ddb was not entered, the kernel will halt the system
+if it was still in device configuration phase, or attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device, if possible.
+The crash dump will then be recovered by
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle.
+It is also possible to force other behaviours from ddb.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /bsd.rd -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr boot 8 ,
+.Xr boot_config 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff8ff687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,277 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.89 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.macppc/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.82 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 macppc
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The macppc supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on macppc.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cua[a-z]*
+Zilog 8530 serial ports, see
+.Xr zs 4 .
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.It Ar tty[a-z]*
+Zilog 8530 serial ports, see
+.Xr zs 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power management device, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tuner*
+Tuner devices, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..02284efb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_macppc.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/boot_macppc.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/boot_macppc.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..93e580b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.macppc/boot_macppc.8
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_macppc.8,v 1.23 2022/09/05 10:29:27 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)boot_macppc.8
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 5 2022 $
+.Dt BOOT_MACPPC 8 macppc
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_macppc
+.Nd macppc system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss System startup
+When powered on, after a panic, or if the system is rebooted via
+.Xr reboot 8
+or
+.Xr shutdown 8 ,
+the Open Firmware will proceed to its initialization,
+and will boot an operating system if the
+.Va auto-boot?\&
+variable is set to
+.Dq true ,
+or will wait for interactive commands otherwise.
+.Ss Boot process description
+The Apple Open Firmware will normally load the kernel from the device and
+filename as instructed by the
+.Va boot-device
+and
+.Va boot-file
+variables.
+If the
+.Va boot-file
+variable is empty, the
+.Ox
+bootloader will look for a kernel named
+.Pa bsd ,
+unless a different filename has been specified in the boot command.
+To reset this variable to its default, empty, value, type the following
+at the Open Firmware prompt:
+.Pp
+.Dl set-default boot-device
+.Pp
+The
+.Ox
+bootstrap program is named
+.Dq ofwboot .
+It can be installed either in a HFS partition or in a
+MSDOS partition on the disk.
+If MBR partitioning is chosen for
+the disk, the bootstrap program will be installed automatically during the
+.Ox
+installation procedure.
+For HFS shared disks, the
+.Pa ofwboot
+file must be installed manually.
+The ofwboot program can be loaded from any Open Firmware recognized
+disk or network device.
+.Ss Boot process options
+If invoked manually without parameters, or if the specified kernel could
+not be loaded, the
+.Ox
+bootloader will let the user enter a boot device, kernel
+filename and boot options.
+.Pp
+If the special line
+.Ic exit
+is entered, the bootloader will attempt to restart the machine.
+.Pp
+The file specification used is of the form:
+.Pp
+.Dl Oo Oo Ar promdev : Oc Ns Ar filename Oc Op Fl acds
+.Pp
+where
+.Ar promdev
+is an optional Open Firmware device name (such as
+.Dq hd
+or
+.Dq ide ) .
+Normal line editing characters can be used when typing the file
+specification.
+.Pp
+The following options are recognized:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "-XXX" -offset indent -compact
+.It Fl a
+Prompt for the root filesystem and swap devices after the devices have
+been configured.
+.It Fl c
+Enter the
+.Dq User Kernel Config
+mode upon startup
+.Pq see Xr boot_config 8 .
+.It Fl d
+Enter the debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+as soon as the kernel console has been initialized.
+.It Fl s
+Boot the system single-user.
+The system will be booted multi-user unless this option is specified.
+.El
+.Ss Abnormal system termination
+In case of system crashes, the kernel will usually enter the kernel
+debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+unless it is not present in the kernel, or it is disabled via the
+.Va ddb.panic
+sysctl.
+Upon leaving ddb, or if ddb was not entered, the kernel will halt the system
+if it was still in device configuration phase, or attempt a dump to the
+configured dump device, if possible.
+The crash dump will then be recovered by
+.Xr savecore 8
+during the next multi-user boot cycle.
+It is also possible to force other behaviours from ddb.
+.Ss Accessing the PROM
+The prom can only be accessed during system reset, or at power-up.
+To enter Open Firmware, press and hold
+.Dq Cntrl
+.Dq Cmd
+.Dq o
+.Dq f
+as the machine resets until it enters the Open Firmware debugger.
+.Pp
+On an Xserve using serial console the System Identifier button is used to
+enter Open Firmware instead of the keyboard.
+To enter Open Firmware, hold down the System Identifier button while pressing
+the Power button.
+When the upper LED bank begins lighting up in sequence, repeatedly press
+the System Identifier button until the seventh LED from the right is
+highlighted in the lower bank.
+Now hold the System Identifier button for two seconds, until all the top
+row LEDs light up.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/ofwboot -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/ofwboot
+system bootstrap (usually installed on a stand-alone FAT partition or an
+Apple HFS partition, to be readable by Open Firmware)
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr boot_config 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..89c741a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.24 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.octeon/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.23 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 octeon
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The octeon supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on octeon.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.It Ar octcf*
+octeon compact flash, see
+.Xr octcf 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.octeon/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f99b2ebf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.13 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.powerpc64/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.12 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 powerpc64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The powerpc64 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on powerpc64.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar ipmi*
+IPMI BMC access, see
+.Xr ipmi 4 .
+.It Ar kcov
+Kernel code coverage tracing, see
+.Xr kcov 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.powerpc64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dfcb7ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.9 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.riscv64/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.6 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 riscv64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The riscv64 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on riscv64.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar apm
+Power Management Interface, see
+.Xr apm 4 .
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bktr*
+Video frame grabbers, see
+.Xr bktr 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar gpio*
+General Purpose Input/Output, see
+.Xr gpio 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar ipmi*
+IPMI BMC access, see
+.Xr ipmi 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar radio*
+FM tuner devices, see
+.Xr radio 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12ae7d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.riscv64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+MAN = MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/MAKEDEV.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/MAKEDEV.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..38f90196
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/MAKEDEV.8
@@ -0,0 +1,319 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.8,v 1.88 2025/09/29 01:02:59 deraadt Exp $
+.\"
+.\" THIS FILE AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED.  DO NOT EDIT.
+.\" generated from:
+.\"
+.\"	OpenBSD: etc.sparc64/MAKEDEV.md,v 1.102 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.common,v 1.122 2025/01/08 23:09:25 kirill Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.man,v 1.10 2025/09/29 01:00:14 deraadt Exp 
+.\"	OpenBSD: MAKEDEV.mansub,v 1.2 2004/02/20 19:13:01 miod Exp 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2004, Miodrag Vallat
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Todd T. Fries <todd@OpenBSD.org>
+.\"
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
+.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+.\"
+.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 29 2025 $
+.Dt MAKEDEV 8 sparc64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Nd create system and device special files
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm MAKEDEV
+.Op Ar name ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The shell script
+.Nm ,
+found in the
+.Pa /dev
+directory, is used to create various special files.
+See
+.Xr intro 4
+for a more complete discussion of special files.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+takes any number of device names as arguments, where the names are
+the common abbreviation for the device or group of devices.
+Files are created in the current working directory.
+.Pp
+Where a device name is followed by a star
+.Sq * ,
+the star must be replaced by a unit number.
+If units are expected for a device but not provided,
+.Nm
+will supply the standard numbers in most cases.
+.Pp
+The sparc64 supports the following devices:
+.Pp
+.Sy Special device names
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar all
+Creates special files for all devices on sparc64.
+.It Ar ramdisk
+Ramdisk kernel devices.
+.It Ar std
+Creates the
+.Sq standard
+devices (console, klog, kmem, ksyms, mem, null,
+stderr, stdin, stdout, tty, zero)
+which are absolutely necessary for the system to function properly.
+.It Ar local
+Creates configuration-specific devices, by invoking the shell file
+.Pa MAKEDEV.local .
+.It Ar redodisks
+Recreates all partitions for disks found in
+.Pa /etc .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Disks
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cd*
+ATAPI and SCSI CD-ROM drives, see
+.Xr cd 4 .
+.It Ar fd*
+Floppy disk drives (3 1/2", 5 1/4"), see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar rd*
+.Dq rd
+pseudo-disks, see
+.Xr rd 4 .
+.It Ar sd*
+SCSI disks, including flopticals, see
+.Xr sd 4 .
+.It Ar vnd*
+.Dq file
+pseudo-disk devices, see
+.Xr vnd 4 .
+.It Ar wd*
+.Dq winchester
+disk drives (ST506, IDE, ESDI, RLL, ...), see
+.Xr wd 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Tapes
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ch*
+SCSI media changers, see
+.Xr ch 4 .
+.It Ar st*
+SCSI tape drives, see
+.Xr st 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Terminal ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar cua[a-z]*
+Zilog 8530 serial port, see
+.Xr zs 4 .
+.It Ar magma*
+Magma multiport cards, see
+.Xr magma 4 .
+.It Ar spif*
+.Dq spif
+multiport cards, see
+.Xr spif 4 .
+.It Ar tty[0-7][0-9a-f]
+NS16x50 serial ports, see
+.Xr com 4 .
+.It Ar tty[a-z]*
+Zilog 8530 serial port, see
+.Xr zs 4 .
+.It Ar ttyh*
+Sab82532 serial devices, see
+.Xr sab 4 .
+.It Ar ttyV*
+Virtual console concentrator, see
+.Xr vcctty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pseudo terminals
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ptm
+pty master device, see
+.Xr ptm 4 .
+.It Ar pty*
+Set of 62 master pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr pty 4 .
+.It Ar tty*
+Set of 62 slave pseudo terminals, see
+.Xr tty 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Console ports
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar console
+PROM console, see
+.Xr pcons 4 .
+.It Ar ttyC-J*
+wscons display devices, see
+.Xr wsdisplay 4 .
+.It Ar wscons
+Minimal wscons devices, see
+.Xr wscons 4 .
+.It Ar wskbd*
+wscons keyboards, see
+.Xr wskbd 4 .
+.It Ar wsmux
+wscons keyboard/mouse mux devices, see
+.Xr wsmux 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Pointing devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar wsmouse*
+wscons mice, see
+.Xr wsmouse 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Printers
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar bpp*
+Parallel port, see
+.Xr bpp 4 .
+.It Ar bpp[jkl]
+.Dq spif
+parallel port, see
+.Xr spif 4 .
+.It Ar bppmag[mno]
+Magma parallel port, see
+.Xr magma 4 .
+.It Ar lpa*
+Polled printer port, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.It Ar lpt*
+IEEE 1284 centronics printer, see
+.Xr lpt 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy USB devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar ttyU*
+USB serial ports, see
+.Xr ucom 4 .
+.It Ar uall
+All USB devices, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.It Ar ugen*
+Generic USB devices, see
+.Xr ugen 4 .
+.It Ar uhid*
+Generic HID devices, see
+.Xr uhid 4 .
+.It Ar fido
+fido/* nodes, see
+.Xr fido 4 .
+.It Ar ujoy
+ujoy/* nodes, see
+.Xr ujoy 4 .
+.It Ar ulpt*
+Printer devices, see
+.Xr ulpt 4 .
+.It Ar usb*
+Bus control devices used by usbd for attach/detach, see
+.Xr usb 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Special purpose devices
+.Bl -tag -width tenletters -compact
+.It Ar audio*
+Audio devices, see
+.Xr audio 4 .
+.It Ar bio
+ioctl tunnel pseudo-device, see
+.Xr bio 4 .
+.It Ar bpf
+Berkeley Packet Filter, see
+.Xr bpf 4 .
+.It Ar diskmap
+Disk mapper, see
+.Xr diskmap 4 .
+.It Ar dri
+Direct Rendering Infrastructure, see
+.Xr drm 4 .
+.It Ar fd
+fd/* nodes, see
+.Xr fd 4 .
+.It Ar dt
+Dynamic Tracer, see
+.Xr dt 4 .
+.It Ar fuse
+Userland Filesystem, see
+.Xr fuse 4 .
+.It Ar hotplug
+devices hot plugging, see
+.Xr hotplug 4 .
+.It Ar openprom
+PROM settings, see
+.Xr openprom 4 .
+.It Ar pci*
+PCI bus devices, see
+.Xr pci 4 .
+.It Ar pf
+Packet Filter, see
+.Xr pf 4 .
+.It Ar pppx*
+PPP Multiplexer, see
+.Xr pppx 4 .
+.It Ar pppac*
+PPP Access Concentrator, see
+.Xr pppac 4 .
+.It Ar rmidi*
+Raw MIDI devices, see
+.Xr midi 4 .
+.It Ar *random
+In-kernel random data source, see
+.Xr random 4 .
+.It Ar tun*
+Network tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tun 4 .
+.It Ar tap*
+Ethernet tunnel driver, see
+.Xr tap 4 .
+.It Ar uk*
+Unknown SCSI devices, see
+.Xr uk 4 .
+.It Ar uperf
+Performance counters, see
+.Xr uperf 4 .
+.It Ar video*
+Video V4L2 devices, see
+.Xr video 4 .
+.It Ar vscsi*
+Virtual SCSI controller, see
+.Xr vscsi 4 .
+.It Ar hvctl
+Hypervisor control channel, see
+.Xr vldcp 4 .
+.It Ar spds
+Service processor domain services channel, see
+.Xr vldcp 4 .
+.It Ar ldom*
+Logical domain services channels, see
+.Xr vldcp 4 .
+.It Ar vdsp*
+Virtual disk server ports, see
+.Xr vdsp 4 .
+.It Ar kstat
+Kernel Statistics, see
+.Xr kstat 4 .
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev -compact
+.It Pa /dev
+The special file directory.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr intro 4 ,
+.Xr config 8 ,
+.Xr mknod 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/Makefile b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..59685cf6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+MAN = boot_sparc64.8 \
+      MAKEDEV.8
+
+include ../../../mandoc.mk
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/boot_sparc64.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/boot_sparc64.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..173d9d01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/man8.sparc64/boot_sparc64.8
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: boot_sparc64.8,v 1.18 2022/09/05 10:29:28 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)boot_sparc.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 4/19/94
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 5 2022 $
+.Dt BOOT_SPARC64 8 sparc64
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm boot_sparc64
+.Nd sparc64 system bootstrapping procedures
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Ss System starts
+When powered on, after a panic, or if the system is rebooted via
+.Xr reboot 8
+or
+.Xr shutdown 8 ,
+the PROM will proceed to its initialization, and will boot an operating
+system if autoboot is enabled.
+.Ss Boot process description
+The sparc64 boot process is split into two parts: a small first-stage bootblock
+that is written into the superblock area of a partition
+.Po
+and hence is limited in size to SBSIZE - DEV_BSIZE bytes
+.Pc ,
+and a second-stage boot program that resides in the filesystem proper.
+The first-stage bootblock is loaded into memory by the PROM.
+After it receives control, it loads the second-stage boot program
+.Sy ofwboot
+from the filesystem.
+The second-stage boot program uses the device driver interface to
+the PROM and the stand-alone filesystem code in
+.Pa libsa.a
+to locate and load the kernel.
+The first-stage bootblock and second-stage boot program can be found in
+.Pa /usr/mdec/bootblk
+and
+.Pa /usr/mdec/ofwboot
+respectively.
+The second-stage boot program commonly resides in the root directory as
+.Pa /ofwboot .
+.Pp
+The boot program attempts to load the kernel from the selected
+boot device, which must currently be an SCSI
+.Pq Pa sd
+or IDE
+.Pq Pa wd
+disk drive, or a CD-ROM
+.Pq Pa cd ,
+or an SCSI tape drive
+.Pq Pa st .
+.Pp
+The UltraSPARC Open Firmware
+will normally look for a bootloader on the device specified by the
+.Va boot-device
+variable.
+The
+.Ox
+bootloader will then look for a kernel named
+.Pa bsd
+by default, unless the
+.Va boot-file
+variable contains a filename, or a different filename has been specified
+in the boot command.
+To reset this variable to its default, empty, value, type the following:
+.Pp
+.D1 Sy ok Li set-default boot-file
+.Pp
+Autoboot is enabled by setting the
+.Va auto-boot?\&
+variable to
+.Dq true ,
+and is the factory default.
+.Ss Boot process options
+The following options are recognized:
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "-XXX" -offset indent -compact
+.It Fl a
+Prompt for the root filesystem and swap devices after the devices have
+been configured.
+.It Fl c
+Enter the
+.Dq User Kernel Configuration
+mode upon startup
+.Pq see Xr boot_config 8 .
+.It Fl d
+Enter the debugger,
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+as soon as the kernel console has been initialized.
+.It Fl s
+Boot the system single-user.
+The system will be booted multi-user unless this option is specified.
+.El
+.Ss Accessing the PROM during runtime
+If the
+.Xr sysctl 8
+variable
+.Va ddb.console
+is enabled, at any time you can break back to the ROM by pressing the
+.Sq L1
+.Pq also known as the Dq stop key
+and
+.Sq a
+keys at the same time (if the console is a serial port the same is
+achieved by sending a
+.Dq break ) ,
+and entering
+.Ic machine prom
+at the prompt.
+If you do this accidentally you can continue whatever was in progress
+by typing
+.Ic go
+at the PROM prompt, and then
+.Ic cont
+to return to the system.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /usr/mdec/ofwboot.net -compact
+.It Pa /bsd
+default system kernel
+.It Pa /bsd.rd
+standalone installation kernel, suitable for disaster recovery
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/bootblk
+primary bootstrap for
+.Dq ffs
+file system
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/ofwboot
+secondary bootstrap (usually also installed as
+.Pa /ofwboot )
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/ofwboot.net
+network bootstrap
+.It Pa /usr/mdec/ofwbootfd
+floppy disk bootstrap
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ddb 4 ,
+.Xr softraid 4 ,
+.Xr boot_config 8 ,
+.Xr halt 8 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr installboot 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8 ,
+.Xr savecore 8 ,
+.Xr shutdown 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/netstart.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/netstart.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8bfa5153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/netstart.8
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: netstart.8,v 1.31 2022/10/25 17:10:13 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2002, Miodrag Vallat.
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)rc.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 12/11/93
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: October 25 2022 $
+.Dt NETSTART 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm netstart
+.Nd network startup script
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Cm sh Pa /etc/netstart
+.Op Fl n
+.Op Ar interface ...
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm
+is a
+.Xr sh 1
+script invoked by
+.Xr rc 8
+during an automatic reboot and after single-user mode is exited;
+it performs network initialization.
+.Pp
+.Nm
+can also be used to start newly created interfaces.
+Its behaviour is controlled to some extent by variables defined in
+.Xr rc.conf 8 .
+.Pp
+During the system boot,
+.Nm
+is executed.
+.Nm
+performs the following operations, in the sequence given:
+.Pp
+.Bl -bullet -compact -offset indent
+.It
+Configure the loopback interface.
+.It
+Configure all physical interfaces.
+.It
+Configure non-physical interfaces that can provide the default gateway,
+such as
+.Xr aggr 4 ,
+.Xr trunk 4 ,
+.Xr svlan 4 ,
+.Xr vlan 4 ,
+.Xr carp 4 ,
+and
+.Xr pppoe 4 .
+.It
+Initialize the routing table and set up the default routes.
+.It
+Configure tunnel interfaces that require a working network
+to reach the other end of the tunnel,
+such as
+.Xr tun 4 ,
+.Xr tap 4 ,
+.Xr gif 4 ,
+.Xr etherip 4 ,
+.Xr gre 4 ,
+.Xr egre 4 ,
+.Xr pflow 4 ,
+and
+.Xr wg 4 .
+.El
+.Pp
+After the system is completely initialized, it is possible to start
+newly created interfaces or apply configuration from
+.Xr hostname.if 5
+files to an existing interfaces.
+.Pp
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl n
+Reports the steps that would be taken,
+without actually configuring anything.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr multicast 4 ,
+.Xr defaultdomain 5 ,
+.Xr hostname.if 5 ,
+.Xr mygate 5 ,
+.Xr ifconfig 8 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command first appeared in
+.Bx 4.0 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/rc.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e4940e4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.8
@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.8,v 1.48 2025/06/01 07:36:05 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)rc.8	8.2 (Berkeley) 12/11/93
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: June 1 2025 $
+.Dt RC 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rc ,
+.Nm rc.firsttime ,
+.Nm rc.local ,
+.Nm rc.securelevel
+.Nd command scripts for system startup
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm rc
+is the command script that is invoked by
+.Xr init 8
+when the system starts up.
+It performs system housekeeping chores and starts up system daemons.
+Additionally,
+.Nm rc
+is intricately tied to the
+.Xr netstart 8
+script, which runs commands and daemons pertaining to the network.
+.Nm rc
+is also used to execute any
+.Xr rc.d 8
+scripts defined in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8 .
+The
+.Nm rc.securelevel ,
+.Nm rc.firsttime ,
+and
+.Nm rc.local
+scripts hold commands which are pertinent only to a specific site.
+.Pp
+All of these startup scripts are controlled to some
+extent by variables defined in
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+which specify which daemons and services to run.
+.Pp
+Before
+.Xr init 8
+starts
+.Nm rc ,
+it sets the process priority, umask, and resource limits according to the
+.Dq daemon
+login class as described in
+.Xr login.conf 5 .
+It then starts
+.Nm rc
+and attempts to execute the sequence of commands therein.
+.Pp
+The first part of
+.Nm rc
+runs an
+.Xr fsck 8
+with option
+.Fl p
+to
+.Dq preen
+all disks of minor inconsistencies resulting
+from the last system shutdown and to check for serious inconsistencies
+caused by hardware or software failure.
+If this auto-check and repair succeeds, then the second part of
+.Nm rc
+is run.
+However, if the file
+.Pa /fastboot
+exists,
+fsck will not be invoked.
+The file is then removed so that fsck will be run on subsequent boots.
+.Pp
+The second part of
+.Nm rc
+then asks
+.Xr rc.conf 8
+for configuration variables,
+mounts filesystems, saves
+.Xr dmesg 8
+output to the file
+.Pa /var/run/dmesg.boot ,
+starts system daemons,
+preserves editor files,
+clears the scratch directory
+.Pa /tmp ,
+uses
+.Xr savecore 8
+to save any possible core image that might have been
+generated as a result of a system crash,
+and relinks kernel objects in a random order.
+.Pp
+If at any point the boot script fails,
+.Xr init 8
+enters single-user mode,
+allowing the superuser a shell on the console.
+On exiting this mode,
+init again invokes
+.Nm rc ,
+but this time without performing the file system preen.
+.Pp
+Before
+.Nm rc
+starts most system daemons,
+.Xr netstart 8
+is executed.
+.Pp
+.Nm rc.securelevel
+is executed by
+.Nm rc
+to start daemons that must be run before the security level changes.
+Following this,
+.Nm rc
+then sets the security level to '1' if it wasn't set already by
+.Nm rc.securelevel .
+See
+.Xr securelevel 7
+for the effects of setting the security level.
+.Pp
+If
+.Nm rc.firsttime
+exists, it is executed once and then deleted.
+Any output is mailed to root.
+.Pp
+.Nm rc.local
+is executed towards the end of
+.Nm rc
+(it is not the very last as there are a few services that must be
+started at the very end).
+Normally,
+.Nm rc.local
+contains commands and daemons that are not part of the
+stock installation.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/etc/rc.securelevelXX" -compact
+.It Pa /etc/netstart
+Command script for network startup.
+.It Pa /etc/rc
+Command scripts for system startup.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.conf
+System daemon configuration database.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.conf.local
+Site specific daemon configuration database.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d
+Directory to hold
+.Xr rc.d 8
+scripts.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d/rc.subr
+Functions used by the
+.Xr rc.d 8
+scripts.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.firsttime
+Commands run on the first boot after creation.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.local
+Site specific command scripts for system startup.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.securelevel
+Commands run before the security level changes.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.shutdown
+Commands run at system shutdown.
+.It Pa /etc/examples/rc.*
+Examples of site specific scripts.
+.It Pa /fastboot
+Tells
+.Nm rc
+not to run
+.Xr fsck 8
+during the next boot.
+.It Pa /var/run/dmesg.boot
+Copy of
+.Xr dmesg 8
+saved by
+.Nm rc
+at boot time.
+.It Pa /etc/random.seed
+Random seed file read by the bootloader;
+updated at system startup and shutdown.
+.It Pa /var/db/host.random
+Random seed file read by
+.Nm rc
+and the installer on upgrades;
+updated at system startup and shutdown.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr sysctl.conf 5 ,
+.Xr securelevel 7 ,
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr netstart 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr rc.d 8 ,
+.Xr rc.shutdown 8 ,
+.Xr rcctl 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.At v4 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/rc.conf.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.conf.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e076ec29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.conf.8
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.conf.8,v 1.31 2022/09/25 22:47:27 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Ian F. Darwin
+.\" Copyright (c) 2014 Ingo Schwarze <schwarze@openbsd.org>
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+.\"    products derived from this software without specific prior written
+.\"    permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+.\" DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 25 2022 $
+.Dt RC.CONF 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rc.conf ,
+.Nm rc.conf.local
+.Nd system daemon configuration database
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The file
+.Nm rc.conf
+contains a series of variable assignments that are used to configure
+the system daemons.
+These variables are read by
+.Xr rc 8
+early on in the boot sequence and every time an
+.Xr rc.d 8
+script is executed.
+.Pp
+It is advisable to leave
+.Nm rc.conf
+untouched, and instead create and edit a new
+.Nm rc.conf.local
+file or use the
+.Xr rcctl 8
+utility.
+Since only the last assignment to any variable takes effect,
+variables set in this file override variables previously set in
+.Nm rc.conf .
+.Pp
+.Nm rc.conf
+is made up of variable assignments
+.Pq Ar variable Ns = Ns Ar value
+with comments designated by a hash mark
+.Pq Sq # .
+.Pp
+.Sy Base system daemon
+configuration variables are used to enable and disable daemon programs
+that are installed by default, and to set their command line options.
+.Pp
+All of these variables follow the format
+.Dq Ar daemon Ns _flags
+where
+.Ar daemon
+is the name of one of the
+.Xr rc.d 8
+daemon control scripts.
+The list of base system daemons, including the information whether
+they are enabled by default, can be displayed with this command:
+.Pp
+.Dl grep _flags /etc/rc.conf
+.Pp
+If one of these variables is set to
+.Cm NO ,
+the respective
+.Ar daemon
+is disabled.
+If set to the empty string, the
+.Ar daemon
+is run with the default command line arguments defined in its
+.Xr rc.d 8
+.Ar daemon
+script, or without command line arguments if no such default exists.
+If set to any other value, including a string containing
+only a single blank character, the
+.Ar daemon
+is run with those command line arguments.
+.Pp
+.Sy Package daemon
+configuration variables are used to enable and disable
+daemon programs installed from
+.Xr packages 7 ,
+and to set their command line options.
+.Pp
+The special
+.Cm pkg_scripts
+variable lists
+.Xr rc.d 8
+.Ar daemon
+control scripts to be started in the specified order.
+For each
+.Ar daemon
+listed, its default command line options can optionally be overridden
+using the variable
+.Ar daemon Ns _flags
+as described above.
+.Pp
+.Sy Base system service
+configuration variables control features available by default
+that are not implemented as daemons.
+They can be set to either
+.Cm YES
+or
+.Cm NO .
+When set to
+.Cm YES ,
+they have the following effects:
+.Bl -tag -width check_quotas
+.It Cm accounting
+rc calls:
+.Xr accton 8
+.Pa /var/account/acct
+.It Cm check_quotas
+rc calls:
+.Xr quotacheck 8
+.Fl a ;
+.Xr quotaon 8
+.Fl a
+.It Cm ipsec
+rc calls:
+.Xr ipsecctl 8
+.Fl f Pa /etc/ipsec.conf
+.It Cm library_aslr
+rc reorders some libraries for improved protection against ROP.
+.It Cm multicast
+See
+.Xr multicast 4 .
+.It Cm pf
+rc calls:
+.Xr pfctl 8
+.Fl ef Pa /etc/pf.conf
+.It Cm spamd_black
+The script
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/spamd
+uses
+.Fl b
+in front of any other configured command line arguments when running
+.Xr spamd 8
+and
+.Xr spamd-setup 8 .
+.El
+.Pp
+.Sy Auxiliary
+configuration variables mostly determine
+the locations of specific configuration files.
+The boot scripts use them as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width amd_master
+.It Cm amd_master
+The
+.Xr amd 8
+master map file.
+The script
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/amd
+appends its content to the command line when starting the auto mounter daemon.
+.It Cm shlib_dirs
+Extra shared library search path entries.
+rc calls:
+.Xr ldconfig 8
+.Pa /usr/X11R6/lib
+.Pa /usr/local/lib
+.Pf $ Brq Ar shlib_dirs
+.It Cm savecore_flags
+rc calls:
+.Xr savecore 8
+.Pf $ Brq Ar savecore_flags
+.Pa /var/crash
+.El
+.Sh EXAMPLES
+Do not start the
+.Xr dhcpd 8
+daemon when booting the system:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+dhcpd_flags=NO
+.Ed
+.Pp
+To run the dhcpd daemon,
+add the following line to
+.Nm rc.conf.local :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+dhcpd_flags=
+.Ed
+.Pp
+To start it with some options:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+dhcpd_flags=-A abandoned
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Run
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/messagebus
+then
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/cupsd
+with the
+.Cm start
+argument at boot time,
+and in reverse order with the
+.Cm stop
+argument at shutdown:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+pkg_scripts=messagebus cupsd
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The default location of the
+.Xr amd 8
+master map file is:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+amd_master=/etc/amd/master	# AMD 'master' map
+.Ed
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr intro 8 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.d 8 ,
+.Xr rcctl 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+file first appeared in
+.Ox 2.2 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/rc.d.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.d.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff4a9bc4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.d.8
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.d.8,v 1.42 2025/08/15 11:35:18 ajacoutot Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2021 Antoine Jacoutot
+.\" Copyright (c) 2011 Robert Nagy, Antoine Jacoutot, Ingo Schwarze
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\"
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: August 15 2025 $
+.Dt RC.D 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rc.d
+.Nd daemon control scripts
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm /etc/rc.d/ Ns Ar daemon
+.Op Fl d | q
+.Op Fl f
+.Ar action
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Pa /etc/rc.d
+directory contains
+.Xr ksh 1
+scripts to start, stop, and reconfigure daemon
+programs
+.Pq Dq services .
+.Pp
+Services installed from
+.Xr packages 7
+may be started at boot time in the order specified by the
+.Va pkg_scripts
+variable from
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ;
+the order will be reversed during shutdown.
+Services comprising
+.Ox
+base are started by
+.Xr rc 8 .
+.Pp
+The options are as follows:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Fl d
+Setting this option will print the function names as they are called
+and prevent the
+.Xr rc.subr 8
+framework from redirecting stdout and stderr to /dev/null.
+This is used to allow debugging of failed
+.Ar actions .
+.It Fl f
+This option only affects the
+.Cm start
+action.
+It will forcibly start the daemon whatever value
+.Va daemon_flags
+is set to.
+If
+.Va daemon_flags
+is set to
+.Dq NO ,
+execution will continue with the script's own defaults unless other
+flags are specified.
+.It Fl q
+Quiet mode.
+Only display the script name and the result of the
+.Ar action
+on error.
+.El
+.Pp
+Each such script responds to the following
+.Ar actions :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width configtest -offset indent -compact
+.It Cm start
+Start the service, if not already running.
+.It Cm stop
+Stop the service.
+.It Cm reload
+Tell the daemon to reload its configuration.
+.It Cm restart
+Perform a stop, then a start.
+.It Cm check
+Return 0 if the daemon is running or 1 if it is not.
+.It Cm configtest
+Check that the daemon configuration is valid.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+Daemon control scripts use a fixed number of
+.Xr ksh 1
+variables when starting a daemon.
+The following can be overridden by site-specific values provided in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8 :
+.Bl -tag -width daemon_timeout -offset indent
+.It Ar daemon Ns _execdir
+Run daemon from the specified directory.
+.It Ar daemon Ns _flags
+Additional arguments to call the daemon with.
+These will be appended to any mandatory arguments already contained in the
+.Va daemon
+variable defined in the control script.
+If
+.Ar daemon Ns _flags
+is set to
+.Dq NO ,
+it will prevent the daemon from starting even when listed in
+.Va pkg_scripts .
+.It Ar daemon Ns _logger
+Redirect standard output and error to
+.Xr logger 1
+using the configured priority (e.g. "daemon.info").
+.It Ar daemon Ns _rtable
+Routing table to run the daemon under, using
+.Xr route 8 .
+.It Ar daemon Ns _timeout
+Maximum time in seconds to wait for the
+.Cm start ,
+.Cm stop
+and
+.Cm reload
+actions to return.
+This is only guaranteed with the default
+.Ic rc_start ,
+.Ic rc_stop
+and
+.Ic rc_reload
+functions.
+.It Ar daemon Ns _user
+User to run the daemon as, using
+.Xr su 1 .
+.El
+.Pp
+To obtain the actual variable names, replace
+.Ar daemon
+with the name of the script.
+For example, postgres is managed through
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/postgresql :
+.Pp
+.Dl daemon_flags=-D /var/postgresql/data -w -l /var/postgresql/logfile
+.Pp
+To override this and increase the debug log level (keeping the existing
+flags), define the following in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8 :
+.Pp
+.Dl postgresql_flags=-D /var/postgresql/data -w -l /var/postgresql/logfile -d 5
+.Pp
+Each script may define its own defaults, as explained in
+.Xr rc.subr 8 .
+.Pp
+.Va daemon_class
+is a special read-only variable.
+It is set to
+.Dq daemon
+unless there is a login class configured in
+.Xr login.conf 5
+with the same name as the
+.Nm rc.d
+script itself,
+in which case it will be set to that login class.
+This allows setting many initial process properties, for example
+environment variables, scheduling priority, and process limits
+such as maximum memory use and number of files.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d/
+Directory containing daemon control scripts.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d/rc.subr
+Functions and variables used by
+.Nm rc.d
+scripts.
+.It Pa /var/run/rc.d/
+Directory containing files recording the variables of currently running daemons.
+Some are informational and some are for matching daemons using
+.Xr pgrep 1
+and
+.Xr pkill 1 .
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr ksh 1 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr rc.subr 8 ,
+.Xr rcctl 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Pa /etc/rc.d
+directory
+first appeared in
+.Ox 4.9 .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/rc.shutdown.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.shutdown.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fae45aaf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.shutdown.8
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: rc.shutdown.8,v 1.17 2024/09/15 19:39:26 kn Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Aaron Campbell
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\"
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 15 2024 $
+.Dt RC.SHUTDOWN 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rc.shutdown
+.Nd command script run at system shutdown
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+When the system is shut down using the
+.Xr reboot 8
+or
+.Xr halt 8
+commands,
+or when
+.Xr init 8
+is signalled to do so,
+or when a keyboard-requested halt is issued (if the architecture supports it),
+.Xr rc 8
+is invoked with the argument
+.Dq shutdown .
+This document details the actions taken by
+.Xr rc 8
+in such an instance.
+.Pp
+Firstly it saves random data for reseeding the kernel random number
+generator during the next boot.
+It then stops any daemons
+defined in the
+.Va pkg_scripts
+variable in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8 ,
+as well as
+.Xr vmd 8 ,
+in that order,
+by passing them the
+.Cm stop
+argument.
+.Pp
+.Xr rc 8
+then runs
+.Nm .
+The administrator should place in this file
+any commands they wish to have executed during shutdown.
+.Pp
+Finally, all
+.Xr carp 4
+interfaces are brought down and then the system shuts down.
+.Pp
+If
+.Xr init 8
+is exiting single-user mode it will also run the first part of shutdown
+(saving random data),
+though not the latter.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width "/etc/rc.shutdown"
+.It Pa /etc/rc.shutdown
+Command script run at system shutdown.
+.It Pa /etc/examples/rc.shutdown
+Example script.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr init 8 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr reboot 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/rc.subr.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.subr.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0451748f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/rc.subr.8
@@ -0,0 +1,437 @@
+.\" 	$OpenBSD: rc.subr.8,v 1.49 2022/10/22 10:34:56 ajacoutot Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2021, 2022 Antoine Jacoutot
+.\" Copyright (c) 2011 Robert Nagy, Antoine Jacoutot, Ingo Schwarze
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\"
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: October 22 2022 $
+.Dt RC.SUBR 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm rc.subr
+.Nd daemon control scripts routines
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm daemon Ns = Ns Ar path_to_executable
+.Nm .\&
+.Pa /etc/rc.d/rc.subr
+.Nm rc_cmd
+.Ar action
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+Apart from a few notable exceptions, rc scripts must follow this
+naming policy:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact
+.It
+When possible, use the same name as the
+.Nm daemon
+it is referring to.
+.It
+It must follow
+.Xr ksh 1
+variable naming: begin with an alphabetic or underscore character, followed by
+one or more alphanumeric or underscore characters.
+Dashes
+.Pq Sq -
+have to be converted to
+underscores
+.Pq Sq _ .
+.El
+.Pp
+Every script under
+.Pa /etc/rc.d
+follows this pattern:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact
+.It
+Define the
+.Va daemon
+variable.
+.It
+Define service-specific defaults for one or more
+.Va daemon_*
+variables (optional).
+.It
+Source
+.Nm ,
+which defines default shell functions and variable values.
+.It
+Override the
+.Va pexp
+variable or any of the
+.Ic rc_*
+functions and set the
+.Va rc_bg
+or
+.Va rc_reload
+variables, if needed.
+.It
+Define an
+.Ic rc_pre
+and/or
+.Ic rc_post
+function, if needed.
+.It
+Call the
+.Ic rc_cmd
+function as
+.Dq "rc_cmd $1" .
+.El
+.Pp
+The following shell functions are defined by
+.Nm :
+.Bl -tag -width rc_reload
+.It Ic rc_check
+Search for processes of the service with
+.Xr pgrep 1
+using the regular expression given in the
+.Va pexp
+variable.
+.It Ic rc_cmd Ar action
+Run the
+.Ar action
+for the current
+.Nm rc.d
+script, based on the settings of various shell variables.
+.Ic rc_cmd
+is extremely flexible, and allows fully functional
+.Nm rc.d
+scripts to be implemented in a small amount of shell code.
+For a given
+.Ar action ,
+if the
+.Ic rc_${action}
+function is not defined, then a default function is provided by
+.Nm rc.subr .
+In addition actions can be disabled by setting the
+.Va rc_${action}
+variable to
+.Dq NO .
+For example, if
+.Dq rc_reload=NO
+is set in the
+.Nm rc.d
+script, and
+.Ic rc_cmd
+is called for the reload action, an error will be raised.
+Similarly, the special variable
+.Va rc_usercheck
+must be set to
+.Dq NO
+if the
+.Cm check
+.Ar action
+requires root privileges.
+.Pp
+The
+.Ar action
+argument can be
+.Cm start ,
+.Cm stop ,
+.Cm reload ,
+.Cm restart ,
+or
+.Cm check :
+.Bl -tag -width restart
+.It Ic check
+Call
+.Ic rc_check .
+Return 0 if the daemon is running or 1 if it is not.
+.It Ic start
+Check that the service is running by calling
+.Ic rc_check .
+If it's not running, call
+.Ic rc_pre
+if it exists, then
+.Ic rc_start .
+.It Ic stop
+Check that the service is running by calling
+.Ic rc_check .
+If it is running,
+call
+.Ic rc_stop
+and wait up to 30 seconds for the daemon to properly shutdown.
+If successful, run
+.Ic rc_post
+if it exists.
+.It Ic restart
+Run the
+.Ar action
+argument
+.Cm stop ,
+then if successful run
+.Cm start .
+.It Ic reload
+Check that the service is running by calling
+.Ic rc_check .
+If it is running,
+call
+.Ic rc_reload .
+.El
+.It Ic rc_configtest
+Check daemon configuration before running
+.Cm start ,
+.Cm reload
+and
+.Cm restart
+if implemented by the
+.Xr rc.d 8
+script.
+.It Ic rc_exec
+Execute argument using
+.Xr su 1
+according to
+.Va daemon_class ,
+.Va daemon_execdir ,
+.Va daemon_user ,
+.Va daemon_rtable
+and
+.Va daemon_logger
+values.
+.It Ic rc_post
+This function is run after
+.Cm stop
+if implemented by the
+.Xr rc.d 8
+script.
+.It Ic rc_pre
+This function is run before
+.Cm start
+if implemented by the
+.Xr rc.d 8
+script.
+.It Ic rc_reload
+Send the
+.Va rc_reload_signal
+using
+.Xr pkill 1
+on the regular expression given in the
+.Va pexp
+variable.
+One has to make sure that sending
+.Dv SIGHUP
+to a daemon will have the desired effect,
+i.e. that it will reload its configuration.
+.It Ic rc_start
+Start the daemon.
+Defaults to:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+rc_exec "${daemon} ${daemon_flags}"
+.Ed
+.It Ic rc_stop
+Stop the daemon.
+Send the
+.Va rc_stop_signal
+using
+.Xr pkill 1
+on the regular expression given in the
+.Va pexp
+variable.
+.El
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+.Ic rc_cmd
+uses the following shell variables to control its behaviour.
+.Bl -tag -width "daemon_timeout"
+.It Va daemon
+The path to the daemon, optionally followed by one or more
+whitespace separated arguments.
+Arguments included here are always used, even if
+.Va daemon_flags
+is empty.
+This variable is required.
+It is an error to source
+.Nm
+without defining
+.Va daemon
+first.
+.It Va daemon_class
+Login class to run the daemon with, using
+.Xr su 1 .
+This is a read only variable that gets set by
+.Nm rc.subr
+itself.
+It searches
+.Xr login.conf 5
+for a login class that has the same name as the
+.Nm rc.d
+script itself and uses that.
+If no such login class exists then
+.Dq daemon
+will be used.
+.It Va daemon_execdir
+Change to this directory before running
+.Ic rc_exec .
+.It Va daemon_flags
+Arguments to call the daemon with.
+.It Va daemon_logger
+Redirect standard output and error to
+.Xr logger 1
+using the configured priority (e.g. "daemon.info").
+.It Va daemon_rtable
+Routing table to run the daemon under, using
+.Xr route 8 .
+.It Va daemon_timeout
+Maximum time in seconds to wait for the
+.Cm start ,
+.Cm stop
+and
+.Cm reload
+actions to return.
+This is only guaranteed with the default
+.Ic rc_start ,
+.Ic rc_stop
+and
+.Ic rc_reload
+functions.
+.It Va daemon_user
+User to run the daemon as, using
+.Xr su 1 .
+.It Va pexp
+A regular expression to be passed to
+.Xr pgrep 1
+in order to find the desired process or to be passed to
+.Xr pkill 1
+to stop it.
+By default this variable contains the
+.Va daemon
+and
+.Va daemon_flags
+variables.
+To override the default value, an
+.Nm rc.d
+script has to redefine this variable
+.Em after
+sourcing
+.Nm .
+.It Va rc_bg
+Can be set to
+.Cm YES
+in an
+.Nm rc.d
+script to force starting the daemon in background when using the default
+.Ic rc_start .
+.It Va rc_reload
+Can be set to
+.Dq NO
+in an
+.Nm rc.d
+script to disable the reload action if the respective daemon
+does not support reloading its configuration.
+.Em The same is possible, but almost never useful, for other actions.
+.It Va rc_reload_signal
+Signal sent to the daemon process
+.Pq Va pexp
+by the default
+.Fn rc_reload
+function.
+Defaults to
+.Em HUP .
+.It Va rc_stop_signal
+Signal sent to the daemon process
+.Pq Va pexp
+by the default
+.Fn rc_stop
+function.
+Default to
+.Em TERM .
+.It Va rc_usercheck
+Can be set to
+.Dq NO
+in an
+.Nm rc.d
+script, if the
+.Cm check
+action needs root privileges.
+.El
+.Pp
+All
+.Va daemon_*
+variables are set in the following ways:
+.Bl -enum
+.It
+Global defaults are provided by
+.Nm :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+daemon_class=daemon
+daemon_execdir=
+daemon_flags=
+daemon_logger=
+daemon_rtable=0
+daemon_timeout=30
+daemon_user=root
+.Ed
+.It
+Service-specific defaults may be provided in the respective
+.Nm rc.d
+script
+.Em before
+sourcing
+.Nm ,
+thus overriding the global defaults.
+.It
+As noted in
+.Xr rc.d 8 ,
+site-specific values provided in
+.Xr rc.conf.local 8
+for
+.Va daemon_execdir ,
+.Va daemon_flags ,
+.Va daemon_logger ,
+.Va daemon_rtable ,
+.Va daemon_timeout ,
+and
+.Va daemon_user
+will override those defaults.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d/
+Directory containing daemon control scripts.
+.It Pa /etc/rc.d/rc.subr
+Functions and variables used by
+.Nm rc.d
+scripts.
+.It Pa /usr/ports/infrastructure/templates/rc.template
+A sample
+.Nm rc.d
+script.
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr rc.conf 8 ,
+.Xr rc.d 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+The
+.Nm
+framework
+first appeared in
+.Ox 4.9 .
+.Sh AUTHORS
+.An -nosplit
+The
+.Nm
+framework was written by
+.An Robert Nagy Aq Mt robert@openbsd.org ,
+.An Antoine Jacoutot Aq Mt ajacoutot@openbsd.org ,
+and
+.An Ingo Schwarze Aq Mt schwarze@openbsd.org .
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/release.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/release.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e126001
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/release.8
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: release.8,v 1.101 2026/04/18 16:54:22 kettenis Exp $
+.\"
+.\"	Copyright (c) 2000 Marco S. Hyman
+.\"	Copyright (c) 2016 Theo Buehler <tb@openbsd.org>
+.\"
+.\"	Permission to copy all or part of this material for any purpose is
+.\"	granted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph
+.\"	are duplicated in all copies.  THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS''
+.\"	AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
+.\"	LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
+.\"	FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: April 18 2026 $
+.Dt RELEASE 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm release
+.Nd building an OpenBSD release
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+There are several steps necessary to build a release:
+.Pp
+.Bl -enum -compact -offset indent
+.It
+Update sources.
+.It
+Build and install a new kernel.
+.It
+Build a new base system.
+.It
+Make and validate the base system release.
+.It
+Build and install Xenocara.
+.It
+Make and validate the Xenocara release.
+.It
+Create boot and installation disk images.
+.It
+Make the third party packages.
+.El
+.Pp
+This manual describes the steps for the
+.Em release
+and
+.Em stable
+branches.
+To build a
+.Em current
+release, additional steps may be required.
+See
+.Lk https://www.openbsd.org/faq/current.html
+for any needed workarounds.
+.Pp
+Commands to be run as a user are preceded by a dollar sign
+.Sq $ .
+Commands that must be run as the superuser are preceded by a hash mark
+.Sq # .
+Privileges will be de-escalated to the user
+.Sy build
+whenever possible.
+.Pp
+Most of the defaults can be overridden by setting
+the appropriate variables in
+.Xr mk.conf 5 .
+.Ss 1. Update sources
+A
+.Nm
+should use sources that were checked out using the same
+.Xr cvs 1
+tag.
+There are two families of tags:
+.Bl -tag -width OPENBSD_x_y_BASE
+.It OPENBSD_x_y_BASE
+The sources for the
+.Ox x.y
+release.
+.It OPENBSD_x_y
+The sources for the
+.Ox x.y
+stable branch.
+It contains the patches described in
+.Lk https://www.openbsd.org/stable.html .
+.El
+.Pp
+See
+.Lk https://www.openbsd.org/anoncvs.html
+for instructions on fetching the sources for the first time.
+.Pp
+To update existing sources to the versions identified by one of the above
+tags, use the commands:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+$ cd /usr/src && cvs up -r TAG -Pd
+$ cd /usr/xenocara && cvs up -r TAG -Pd
+$ cd /usr/ports && cvs up -r TAG -Pd
+.Ed
+.Pp
+.Sy Warning :
+.Xr cvs 1
+tags are
+.Sq sticky .
+See
+.Xr cvs 1
+for more information.
+.Ss 2. Build and install a new kernel
+Always build and install a new kernel and reboot before
+building the programs that will use the kernel.
+This ensures that any new system calls, for example, will be present
+when needed.
+.Pp
+.Dl # cd /sys/arch/$(machine)/compile/GENERIC.MP
+.Pp
+Replace
+.Pa GENERIC.MP
+with a different kernel configuration if necessary.
+.Pp
+Create the build directory and configuration file,
+then compile and install the kernel:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# make obj
+# make config
+# make && make install
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The current kernel is copied to
+.Pa /obsd
+and the new kernel to
+.Pa /bsd .
+Reboot.
+.Ss 3. Build a new base system
+The build process will place the object files in a tree under
+.Pa /usr/obj .
+This directory must be owned by build:wobj with mode 770.
+.Pp
+Create the tree of obj directories and begin the build:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# cd /usr/src
+# make obj && make build
+.Ed
+.Pp
+After the build is completed, update
+.Pa /etc ,
+.Pa /var ,
+and
+.Pa /dev ,
+using
+.Xr sysmerge 8
+and
+.Xr MAKEDEV 8 :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# sysmerge
+# cd /dev && ./MAKEDEV all
+.Ed
+.Pp
+At this point, the base system is up to date with the code
+that will be made into a release.
+.Ss 4. Make and validate the base system release
+The base system release consists of at least one generic kernel,
+some installation media, the release tarballs,
+installation instructions, and checksum files.
+.Pp
+On arm64, armv7 and riscv64 architectures, additional files are required.
+Install the following packages using
+.Xr pkg_add 1
+or from
+.Xr ports 7 :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "riscv64" -offset indent -compact
+.It arm64
+raspberrypi-firmware u-boot-rpi
+.It armv7
+dtb u-boot-arm
+.El
+.Pp
+and install the following firmwares using
+.Xr fw_update 8 :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "riscv64" -offset indent -compact
+.It riscv64
+riscv64-spacemit-dtb
+.El
+.Pp
+Create a
+.Va RELEASEDIR
+directory to store the release files.
+This directory must be writable by
+.Sy build .
+.Pp
+To build a release, it is necessary to prepare a filesystem mounted with the
+.Em noperm
+.Xr mount 8
+option.
+Either standard FFS or
+.Xr mount_mfs 8
+may be used.
+The root of this filesystem must have owner
+.Sy build
+and mode 700.
+On this filesystem, create a
+.Va DESTDIR
+directory.
+This will be the root of a complete
+.Ox
+installation.
+.Pp
+.Sy Warning :
+.Va DESTDIR
+and
+.Va RELEASEDIR
+must not refer to any directory with
+.Pa /mnt
+in its path, as
+.Pa /mnt
+is used in the release generation process.
+The
+.Xr vnd 4
+device vnd0
+is also used and must not be configured.
+.Pp
+Make the release and check the contents of the release tarballs:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# export DESTDIR=your-destdir RELEASEDIR=your-releasedir
+# cd /usr/src/etc && make release
+# cd /usr/src/distrib/sets && sh checkflist
+# unset RELEASEDIR DESTDIR
+.Ed
+.Ss 5. Build and install Xenocara
+Xenocara is based on the X.Org modular build system.
+Its sources are supposed to be in
+.Pa /usr/xenocara .
+The
+.Pa /usr/src
+tree is also needed while building Xenocara.
+The object directory
+.Pa /usr/xobj
+should be empty and owned by build:wobj with mode 770.
+.Pp
+The following steps will build and install Xenocara.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# cd /usr/xenocara
+# make bootstrap
+# make obj
+# make build
+.Ed
+.Ss 6. Make and validate the Xenocara release
+Xenocara uses
+.Va DESTDIR
+and
+.Va RELEASEDIR
+as described above.
+Use a different
+.Va DESTDIR
+for the Xenocara release than for the base release,
+as the contents of
+.Va DESTDIR
+will be removed.
+.Pp
+The steps to build and validate the Xenocara release are:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# export DESTDIR=your-destdir RELEASEDIR=your-releasedir
+# make release
+# make checkdist
+# unset RELEASEDIR DESTDIR
+.Ed
+.Pp
+At this point,
+.Ox
+base system and X Window System tarballs are in
+.Va RELEASEDIR .
+.Ss 7. Create boot and installation disk images
+The disk images
+.No install${ Ns Va VERSION Ns }.img
+and
+.No install${ Ns Va VERSION Ns }.iso
+are suitable for installs without network connectivity.
+They contain the tarballs built in the previous steps.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# export RELDIR=your-releasedir RELXDIR=your-xenocara-releasedir
+# cd /usr/src/distrib/$(machine)/iso && make
+# make install
+.Ed
+.Pp
+The two installer images are now stored in the local release
+directory.
+.Ss 8. Make the third party packages
+The ports subsystem of contributed applications is capable of producing
+packages for installation, either individually or in bulk.
+This is described in
+.Xr ports 7 .
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr cvs 1 ,
+.Xr pkg_add 1 ,
+.Xr mk.conf 5 ,
+.Xr ports 7 ,
+.Xr sysmerge 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/security.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/security.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28c300c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/security.8
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: security.8,v 1.28 2025/03/31 17:35:28 schwarze Exp $
+.\"
+.\" David Leonard, 2001. Public Domain.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: March 31 2025 $
+.Dt SECURITY 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm security
+.Nd periodic system security check
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+.Nm
+is a command script that examines the system for some signs of security
+weaknesses.
+It is only a security aid and does not offer complete protection.
+.Nm
+is run by
+.Xr daily 8 ,
+which mails any output to root on a daily basis.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm
+script carries out the following list of simple checks:
+.Bl -bullet
+.It
+Check the
+.Xr master.passwd 5
+and
+.Xr group 5
+files for
+syntax, empty passwords, partially closed accounts,
+suspicious UIDs, suspicious GIDs, and duplicate entries.
+.It
+Check root's home directory and login environment for
+insecure permissions, suspicious paths, and umask commands in the
+dotfiles.
+.It
+Check for suspicious commands in
+.Pa /etc/mail/aliases .
+.It
+Check for insecurities in
+.Pa /etc/hosts.lpd .
+.It
+Check user
+.Pa .rhosts
+and
+.Pa .shosts
+files for open access.
+.It
+Check user home directory permissions.
+.It
+Check many user dotfile permissions.
+.It
+Check user mailbox permissions.
+.It
+Check NFS
+.Xr exports 5
+file for global export entries.
+.It
+Check for changes in setuid/setgid files and devices.
+.It
+Check disk ownership and permissions.
+.It
+Check for changes in the device file list.
+.It
+Check for permission changes in special files and system binaries listed in
+.Pa /etc/mtree/special .
+.Nm
+also provides hooks for administrators to create their own lists.
+These lists should be kept in
+.Pa /etc/mtree/
+and filenames must have the suffix
+.Dq .secure .
+The following example shows how to create such a list,
+to protect the programs in
+.Pa /bin :
+.Bd -literal -offset 4n
+# mtree -cx -p /bin -K sha256digest,type > /etc/mtree/bin.secure
+# chown root:wheel /etc/mtree/bin.secure
+# chmod 600 /etc/mtree/bin.secure
+.Ed
+.Pp
+.Sy Note:
+These checks do not provide complete protection against
+Trojan horse binaries, as
+the miscreant can modify the tree specification to match the replaced binary.
+For details on really protecting yourself against modified binaries, see
+.Xr mtree 8 .
+.It
+Check for changes in files listed in
+.Pa /etc/changelist .
+Files being created or deleted,
+as well as content change in the files themselves,
+are reported.
+See
+.Xr changelist 5
+for further details.
+.It
+Check for changes to the disklabels and partition tables of mounted disks.
+.It
+Report on the installation or removal of any system
+.Xr package 5 .
+.It
+Check
+.Xr hostname.if 5
+file permissions.
+.El
+.Pp
+The intent of the
+.Nm
+script is to point out some obvious holes to the system administrator.
+.Sh ENVIRONMENT
+The following variables can be set in
+.Pa /etc/daily.local :
+.Pp
+.Bl -tag -width "PASSWDSKIP" -compact
+.It Ev PASSWDSKIP
+A whitespace-separated list of
+.Ar name : Ns Ar shell
+pairs allowed to have empty passwords.
+For example, a machine running both CVS and gotd for anonymous access
+might set:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+PASSWDSKIP="anoncvs:/usr/local/bin/anoncvssh
+            anonymous:/usr/local/bin/gotsh"
+.Ed
+.Pp
+.It Ev SUIDSKIP
+A whitespace-separated list of absolute paths to be skipped
+in setuid/setgid file checks and in device special file checks.
+Avoid trailing slashes.
+.El
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /dev/changelist -compact
+.It Pa /etc/changelist
+.It Pa /etc/daily
+.It Pa /etc/mtree
+.It Pa /usr/libexec/security
+.It Pa /var/backups
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr changelist 5 ,
+.Xr daily 8 ,
+.Xr mtree 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+A
+.Nm
+shell script appeared in
+.Bx 4.3 Reno ,
+but most functionality only came with
+.Bx 4.4 .
+.Sh AUTHORS
+.An -nosplit
+The present manual was written by
+.An David Leonard
+for
+.Ox 2.9 .
+.An Andrew Fresh Aq Mt afresh1@openbsd.org
+and
+.An Ingo Schwarze Aq Mt schwarze@openbsd.org
+rewrote
+.Nm
+from scratch in
+.Xr perl 1
+for
+.Ox 5.0 .
+.Sh BUGS
+The name of this script may provide a false sense of
+.Nm security .
+.\" Well, I thought it was amusing.
+.Pp
+There are perhaps an infinite number of ways the system can be compromised
+without this script noticing.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/ssl.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/ssl.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98ebc118
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/ssl.8
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: ssl.8,v 1.70 2024/05/30 14:06:23 tb Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Theo de Raadt, Bob Beck
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 30 2024 $
+.Dt SSL 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm ssl
+.Nd details for libssl and libcrypto
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+This document describes some of the issues relating to the use of
+the OpenSSL libssl and libcrypto libraries.
+This document is intended as an overview of what the libraries do,
+and what uses them.
+.Pp
+The libssl and libcrypto libraries implement the TLS version 1 protocol.
+It is most commonly used by the HTTPS protocol for encrypted
+web transactions, as can be done with
+.Xr httpd 8 .
+The libcrypto library is also used by various programs such as
+.Xr ssh 1 ,
+.Xr sshd 8 ,
+and
+.Xr isakmpd 8 .
+.Sh SERVER CERTIFICATES
+The most common uses of TLS will require you to generate a server
+certificate, which is provided by your host as evidence of its identity
+when clients make new connections.
+The certificates reside in the
+.Pa /etc/ssl
+directory, with the keys in the
+.Pa /etc/ssl/private
+directory.
+.Pp
+Private keys can be encrypted using AES and a passphrase to protect their
+integrity should the encrypted file be disclosed.
+However, it is important to note that encrypted server keys mean that the
+passphrase needs to be typed in every time the server is started.
+If a passphrase is not used, you will need to be absolutely sure your
+key file is kept secure.
+.Sh GENERATING RSA SERVER CERTIFICATES FOR WEB SERVERS
+To support HTTPS transactions in
+.Xr httpd 8
+you will need to generate an RSA certificate.
+Start by creating a private key of the desired length:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl genrsa -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 4096
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Or, if you wish the key to be encrypted with a passphrase that you will
+have to type in when starting servers
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl genrsa -aes256 -out /etc/ssl/private/server.key 4096
+.Ed
+.Pp
+If you are only generating a private key to use with
+.Xr acme-client 1
+(for example, with a non-default key length)
+you may stop here.
+.Pp
+Otherwise, the next step is to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
+which is used to get a Certificate Authority (CA) to sign your certificate.
+To do this use the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl req -new -key /etc/ssl/private/server.key \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/private/server.csr
+.Ed
+.Pp
+This
+.Pa server.csr
+file can then be given to a Certificate Authority who will sign the key.
+.Pp
+You can also sign the key yourself, using the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl x509 -sha256 -req -days 365 \e
+  -in /etc/ssl/private/server.csr \e
+  -signkey /etc/ssl/private/server.key \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/server.crt
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Note that standard web browsers do not use the common name of a subject,
+but instead require that subject alt names are provided.
+This requires the use of
+.Ar -extfile Pa server.ext
+when self-signing.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# this is an example server.ext file
+subjectAltName=DNS:example.com,DNS:www.example.com
+.Ed
+.Pp
+With
+.Pa /etc/ssl/server.crt
+and
+.Pa /etc/ssl/private/server.key
+in place, you should be able to start
+.Xr httpd 8
+with SSL configured, enabling HTTPS transactions with your machine on port 443.
+.Pp
+You will most likely want to generate a self-signed certificate in the
+manner above along with your certificate signing request to test your
+server's functionality even if you are going to have the certificate
+signed by another Certificate Authority.
+Once your Certificate Authority returns the signed certificate to you,
+you can switch to using the new certificate by replacing the self-signed
+.Pa /etc/ssl/server.crt
+with the certificate signed by your Certificate Authority, and then
+restarting
+.Xr httpd 8 .
+.Sh GENERATING ECDSA SERVER CERTIFICATES
+First, generate a private ECDSA key.
+The following command will use a NIST/SECG curve over a 384-bit
+prime field:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl ecparam -name secp384r1 -genkey \e
+  -noout -out /etc/ssl/private/eccert.key
+.Ed
+.Pp
+Note that some Certificate Authorities will only issue certificates for
+keys generated using prime256v1 parameters.
+.Pp
+If you are only generating a private key to use with
+.Xr acme-client 1 ,
+you may stop here.
+Otherwise, the next step is to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
+which is used to get a Certificate Authority (CA) to sign your certificate.
+To do this use the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl req -key /etc/ssl/private/eccert.key -new \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/private/eccert.csr
+.Ed
+.Pp
+This
+.Pa eccert.csr
+file can then be given to a CA who will sign the key.
+.Pp
+You can also sign the key yourself, using the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl x509 -sha256 -req -days 365 \e
+  -in /etc/ssl/private/eccert.csr \e
+  -signkey /etc/ssl/private/eccert.key \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/eccert.crt
+.Ed
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr acme-client 1 ,
+.Xr openssl 1 ,
+.Xr ssh 1 ,
+.Xr ssl 3 ,
+.Xr httpd 8 ,
+.Xr isakmpd 8 ,
+.Xr rc 8 ,
+.Xr smtpd 8 ,
+.Xr sshd 8 ,
+.Xr starttls 8
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/starttls.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/starttls.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8d1a1618
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/starttls.8
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+.\" $OpenBSD: starttls.8,v 1.29 2025/05/05 20:50:03 tedu Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 2001 Jose Nazario <jose@monkey.org>
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
+.\" INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
+.\" AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL
+.\" THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+.\" EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+.\" PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
+.\" OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+.\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
+.\" OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
+.\" ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 5 2025 $
+.Dt STARTTLS 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm starttls
+.Nd ESMTP over TLS/SSL
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+STARTTLS is an ESMTP option, defined in RFC 3207, which is used to conduct
+ESMTP transactions over TLS circuits.
+This is used to increase the security of mail server transactions.
+.Pp
+STARTTLS allows for the combination of several security solutions for MTA
+(mail transport agent) level services through the TLS suite.
+These security features include:
+.Bl -tag -width Ds
+.It Confidentiality
+Encryption is used to protect data from passive monitoring.
+.It Integrity
+Hash algorithms are used to ensure the integrity of the
+transmitted data.
+This protects data from modification in transit.
+.It Authentication
+The use of public key encryption allows for the strong authentication of
+either, or both, communicating parties.
+This can be used to allow for select features, such as relaying,
+to be controlled more securely.
+.El
+.Pp
+A new ESMTP option, STARTTLS, has been added.
+This is presented by the server when an ESMTP session is initiated.
+The client then begins the TLS portion of the ESMTP session by issuing
+the command
+.Dq STARTTLS .
+The remaining portion of the ESMTP session occurs over a TLS channel.
+.Ss Creating a private key and certificate for an MTA
+This example assumes you are creating your own self-signed certificates
+for use with
+.Xr smtpd 8
+and STARTTLS.
+If you have an existing private key and you simply wish to generate
+a new certificate (for example, if your old certificate has expired),
+see the section entitled
+.Sx Creating a certificate with an existing private key .
+.Pp
+For the purposes of this example the certificates will be stored in
+.Pa /etc/ssl ,
+though it is possible to use a different directory if needed.
+.Pp
+Next, you must generate an
+.Ar RSA
+private key:
+.Pp
+.Dl # openssl genrsa -out /etc/ssl/private/mail.example.com.key 4096
+.Pp
+This would generate a 4096-bit
+.Ar RSA
+key stored in the file
+.Pa mail.example.com.key .
+.Pp
+Once you have generated the
+.Ar RSA
+key, you can generate a self-signed certificate from it using the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl req -x509 -new -key /etc/ssl/private/mail.example.com.key \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/mail.example.com.crt -days 365
+.Ed
+.Pp
+You may adjust the lifetime of the certificate via the
+.Fl days
+parameter (one year in this example).
+.Pp
+You can verify that the newly-generated certificate has correct information
+with the following command:
+.Pp
+.Dl # openssl x509 -in /etc/ssl/mail.example.com.crt -text
+.Pp
+It is better to configure and use
+.Xr acme-client 1
+to obtain a signed certificate.
+.Pp
+Because the private key files are unencrypted,
+MTAs can be picky about using tight permissions on those files.
+The certificate directory and the files therein should be
+readable and writable only by the owner (root).
+A simple way to ensure this is to run the following:
+.Pp
+.Dl # chmod -R go-rwx /etc/ssl/private
+.Ss Creating a certificate with an existing private key
+This example assumes you already have an existing private key,
+.Pa /etc/ssl/private/mail.example.com.key .
+You can generate a new certificate based on this key using the command:
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# openssl req -x509 -new -key /etc/ssl/private/mail.example.com.key \e
+  -out /etc/ssl/mail.example.com.crt -days 365
+# chmod 600 /etc/ssl/mail.example.com.crt
+.Ed
+.Pp
+You may adjust the lifetime of the certificate via the
+.Fl days
+parameter (one year in this example).
+.Pp
+After having installed the certificates,
+the mail server needs to be configured to accept TLS sessions
+and use the key and certificate.
+For
+.Xr smtpd 8 ,
+it's as simple as adding pki configuration to
+.Xr smtpd.conf 5 :
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+pki mail.example.com cert "/etc/ssl/mail.example.com.crt"
+pki mail.example.com key "/etc/ssl/private/mail.example.com.key"
+
+listen on [...] tls pki mail.example.com auth
+.Ed
+.Pp
+After restarting the mail server, a new option should be presented for ESMTP
+transactions, STARTTLS.
+You can test this by connecting to the local host and issuing the
+.Dq EHLO
+command.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+# telnet localhost 25
+Trying 127.0.0.1...
+Connected to localhost.
+Escape character is '^]'.
+220 localhost ESMTP OpenSMTPD
+EHLO localhost
+.Ed
+.Pp
+After typing
+.Em EHLO localhost ,
+you should receive something like the following back.
+.Bd -literal -offset indent
+250-localhost Hello localhost [127.0.0.1], pleased to meet you
+250-8BITMIME
+250-ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES
+250-SIZE 36700160
+250-DSN
+250-STARTTLS
+250 HELP
+.Ed
+.Pp
+You should see
+.Dq STARTTLS
+listed along with the other options.
+If so, congratulations, the MTA will now use TLS to encrypt your mail
+traffic when the remote server supports it.
+If not, check
+.Pa /var/log/maillog
+to see whether the MTA has reported any security problems or other errors.
+.Ss Uses for TLS equipped MTAs
+The most obvious use of a cryptographically enabled MTA
+is for confidentiality of the electronic mail transaction and the
+integrity checking provided by the cipher suite.
+All traffic between the two mail servers is encrypted, including the
+sender and recipient addresses.
+TLS also allows for authentication of either or both systems in the transaction.
+.Pp
+One use of public key cryptography is for strong authentication.
+We can use this authentication to selectively relay clients, including
+other mail servers and mobile clients like laptops.
+However, there have been some problems getting some mail clients to work using
+certificate-based authentication.
+Clients will have to generate certificates and have them
+signed (for trust validation) by a trusted CA (certificate authority).
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr mail 1 ,
+.Xr openssl 1 ,
+.Xr smtpd 8 ,
+.Xr ssl 8
+.Sh STANDARDS
+.Rs
+.%A P. Hoffman
+.%D February 2002
+.%R RFC 3207
+.%T SMTP Service Extension for Secure SMTP over Transport Layer Security
+.Re
+.Sh CAVEATS
+Because TLS can only authenticate at the server level, true
+end-to-end authentication of the mail message cannot be performed with
+only the use of STARTTLS on the server.
+The use of S/MIME or PGP email and trustworthy key hierarchies can guarantee
+full confidentiality and integrity of the entire message path.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/sticky.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/sticky.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bb046a05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/sticky.8
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: sticky.8,v 1.11 2023/05/24 15:48:11 op Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: sticky.8,v 1.3 1994/11/30 19:36:27 jtc Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991, 1993
+.\"	The Regents of the University of California.  All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
+.\"    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+.\"    without specific prior written permission.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.\"     @(#)sticky.8	8.1 (Berkeley) 6/5/93
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: May 24 2023 $
+.Dt STICKY 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm sticky
+.Nd sticky text and append-only directories
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+A special file mode, called the
+.Em sticky bit
+.Pq mode Dv S_ISVTX ,
+is used to indicate special treatment for files and directories.
+See
+.Xr chmod 2
+or
+the file
+.Pa /usr/include/sys/stat.h
+for an explanation of file modes.
+.Sh STICKY FILES
+Historically, an executable shareable file which had the sticky bit set
+was not immediately discarded from swap space after execution.
+The kernel hoarded the text segment of the file for future reuse,
+thus avoiding having to reload the program.
+This is no longer true on modern systems;
+the current virtual memory system keeps track of recently used executables,
+making the sticky bit for files redundant.
+The sticky bit can still be set on files, but without any effect.
+.Pp
+Only the superuser can set the sticky bit on a file,
+though the owner of the file may clear the sticky bit.
+.Sh STICKY DIRECTORIES
+A directory with the
+.Sq sticky bit
+set places restrictions on file deletion:
+a file in a sticky directory may only be removed or renamed
+by a user if the user has write permission for the directory and
+the user is the owner of the file, the owner of the directory,
+or the superuser.
+This feature is usefully applied to directories such as
+.Pa /tmp
+which must be publicly writable but
+should deny users the license to arbitrarily
+delete or rename each others' files.
+.Pp
+Any user may create a sticky directory.
+See
+.Xr chmod 1
+for details about modifying file modes.
+.Sh HISTORY
+A
+.Nm
+command appeared in
+.At 32v .
+.Sh BUGS
+Neither
+.Xr open 2
+nor
+.Xr mkdir 2
+will create a file with the sticky bit set.
diff --git a/static/openbsd/man8/yp.8 b/static/openbsd/man8/yp.8
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7590e142
--- /dev/null
+++ b/static/openbsd/man8/yp.8
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+.\"	$OpenBSD: yp.8,v 1.34 2022/09/27 13:30:36 kn Exp $
+.\"	$NetBSD: yp.8,v 1.9 1995/08/11 01:16:52 thorpej Exp $
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1996 Theo de Raadt <deraadt@theos.com>
+.\" All rights reserved.
+.\"
+.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+.\" are met:
+.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+.\"    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+.\"    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+.\"
+.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+.\" OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+.\" ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+.\" DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
+.\"
+.Dd $Mdocdate: September 27 2022 $
+.Dt YP 8
+.Os
+.Sh NAME
+.Nm yp
+.Nd description of the YP subsystem
+.Sh SYNOPSIS
+.Nm ypinit
+.Fl m Op Ar domainname
+.Nm ypinit
+.Fl s Ar master_server Op Ar domainname
+.Nm ypinit
+.Fl u Op Ar domainname
+.Pp
+.Nm ypbind
+.Op Fl insecure
+.Op Fl ypset
+.Op Fl ypsetme
+.Pp
+.Nm ypset
+.Op Fl d Ar domain
+.Op Fl h Ar host
+.Ar server
+.Pp
+.Nm yppoll
+.Op Fl d Ar domain
+.Op Fl h Ar host
+.Ar mapname
+.Pp
+.Nm ypcat
+.Op Fl kt
+.Op Fl d Ar domainname
+.Ar mapname
+.Nm ypcat
+.Fl x
+.Pp
+.Nm ypmatch
+.Op Fl kt
+.Op Fl d Ar domainname
+.Ar key ... mapname
+.Nm ypmatch
+.Fl x
+.Pp
+.Nm ypwhich
+.Op Fl t
+.Op Fl d Ar domain
+.Oo
+.Op Fl h
+.Ar host
+.Oc
+.Nm ypwhich
+.Op Fl t
+.Op Fl d Ar domain
+.Op Fl h Ar host
+.Fl m Op Ar mname
+.Nm ypwhich
+.Fl x
+.Pp
+.Nm ypserv
+.Op Fl 1dx
+.Op Fl a Ar aclfile
+.Pp
+.Nm ypxfr
+.Op Fl cf
+.Op Fl C Ar tid prog ipadd port
+.Op Fl d Ar domain
+.Op Fl h Ar host
+.Op Fl s Ar domain
+.Ar mapname
+.Pp
+.Nm yppush
+.Op Fl v
+.Op Fl d Ar domainname
+.Op Fl h Ar hostname
+.\" .Op Fl p Ar paralleljobs
+.\" .Op Fl t Ar timeout
+.Ar mapname
+.Sh DESCRIPTION
+The
+.Nm YP
+subsystem allows network management of passwd, group, and
+hosts file entries through the functions
+.Xr getpwent 3 ,
+.Xr getgrent 3
+and
+.Xr gethostbyname 3 .
+A number of other databases can be network-managed as well,
+and have their respective functions.
+.Nm YP
+also provides hooks for numerous other client programs
+such as
+.Xr amd 8
+and
+.Xr rpc.bootparamd 8
+to access distributed and shareable versions
+of their maps through
+.Nm YP .
+The YP subsystem requires that
+.Xr portmap 8
+be running, since the entire subsystem uses the RPC subsystem.
+.Pp
+.Nm ypinit
+is used to initialize
+.Nm YP
+as a master or a slave.
+This creates various files in
+.Pa /var/yp .
+After running
+.Nm ypinit Fl m ,
+optionally edit
+.Pa /var/yp/DOMAINNAME/Makefile
+to change settings, for example to switch from the default
+backwards compatible mode to secure mode.
+Finally, always run
+.Xr make 1
+in
+.Pa /var/yp .
+See
+.Xr Makefile.yp 8
+for details.
+.Pp
+If set up as a slave, the required databases are automatically copied
+from the specified server.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm YP
+client subsystem is started automatically in
+.Pa /etc/rc
+if the directory
+.Pa /var/yp/binding
+exists.
+The client subsystem can be turned on and off by creating or
+deleting that directory.
+.Xr ypbind 8
+will create that directory if run by hand.
+.Pp
+The
+.Nm YP
+server subsystem is started automatically in
+.Pa /etc/rc
+if the directory
+.Pa /var/yp/DOMAINNAME
+exists.
+This directory is automatically created by
+.Xr ypinit 8
+(which initializes the machine as a
+.Nm YP
+server).
+.Pp
+If
+.Nm ypbind
+cannot find a server, the system behaves the same way as Sun's code
+does: it hangs.
+.Sh FILES
+.Bl -tag -width /var/yp/Makefile.main -compact
+.It Pa /var/yp/Makefile.main
+Top level YP Makefile
+.It Pa /var/yp/Makefile.yp
+YP maps Makefile
+.El
+.Sh SEE ALSO
+.Xr domainname 1 ,
+.Xr ypcat 1 ,
+.Xr ypmatch 1 ,
+.Xr ypwhich 1 ,
+.Xr yp_bind 3 ,
+.Xr defaultdomain 5 ,
+.Xr group 5 ,
+.Xr passwd 5 ,
+.Xr resolv.conf 5 ,
+.Xr Makefile.yp 8 ,
+.Xr portmap 8 ,
+.Xr ypbind 8 ,
+.Xr ypinit 8 ,
+.Xr yppoll 8 ,
+.Xr yppush 8 ,
+.Xr ypserv 8 ,
+.Xr ypset 8 ,
+.Xr ypxfr 8
+.Sh HISTORY
+This free
+.Nm YP
+subsystem is thought to be compatible with Sun's implementation.
+It is, of course, not compatible with
+.Nm NIS+
+or any other
+.Dq secure
+.Nm YP
+subsystem other than the native one.
+.Pp
+The name
+.Nm YP
+stands for Yellow Pee.
+.Pp
+The ypbind, most library components, and userland programs were implemented
+by
+.An Theo de Raadt Aq Mt deraadt@theos.com .
+The current
+.Xr getpwent 3
+implementation was done by
+.An Jason Downs Aq Mt downsj@downsj.com .
+The server component was implemented by
+.An Mats O Jansson Aq Mt moj@stacken.kth.se .